Oracle Hyperion Planning 11.1.

1:
Installation and Configuration

m y
Student Guide

d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
D70058GC10
Edition 1.0
n a e
September 2008

t e r U s
D56353

I n
c l e

r a
O
 Author Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Theresa Songco Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and

Technical Contributors other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your
and Reviewers own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in
any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may
Robert Mead not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish,
license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the
Vicki Hardiman express authorization of Oracle.
Emilya Altman
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you
Shankar Viswanathan find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University,
Todd Newman 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
warranted to be error-free.
David Falasco
Ronald Reiley Restricted Rights Notice

If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using

Editor the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is
applicable:
Susan Moxley
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or
Graphic Designer disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle
license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Priya Saxena
Trademark Notice

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other

names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Table of Contents 0

Preface
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Course Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Course Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Student Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Activity Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Module 1: Installation Overview

Lesson 1: Introduction to Planning

Oracles Enterprise Performance Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
m y
d e
Planning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Planning Product Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

c a
Additional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

e A
Planning Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Client Tier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
l
Server Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
c
r a
Data Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Planning Adapters Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

O ly
Oracle Data Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

l & On
Financial Data Quality Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Foundation Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

a e
Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
n
e r
Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
s
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
t U
Smart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
I n
Calculation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

c l e
Essbase Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

r a
Provider Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Essbase Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
O
 Table of Contents

Reporting and Analysis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Lesson 2: Planning the Installation

Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installation Planning Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Preparing the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Obtaining Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Client Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Operating System and Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Disk Space and RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Screen Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Runtime Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Server Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Operating System and Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Disk Space and RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
m y
d e
Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Repository Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

c a
Java Application and Web Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Preparing the Required Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
A
Foundation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
e
c l
Essbase Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Reporting and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

r a
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Preparing the Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
O ly
Preparing Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

l & On
Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Microsoft SQL Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

n a e
IBM DB2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

t e r U s
Preparing the Security Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

I n
Setting Up Java Application Servers and Web Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Java Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
l e
Web Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
c
Default Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

r a
EPM System Installer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

O
iv Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Table of Contents

Installation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Silent Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Installation Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Classroom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Module 2: Product Installation

Lesson 3: Installing Foundation Services

Foundation Services Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing Shared Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Installing Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Lesson 4: Installing Essbase Services

Essbase Services Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Installing Essbase Client and Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 m y
d e
Installing Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

c a
Installing Provider Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Installing Essbase Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

e A
l
Lesson 5: Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect
c
r a
Planning Installation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
O ly
Installing Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

l & On
Installing Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Internet Information Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
a e
Microsoft .NET 2.0 Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
n
t e r U s
Installing Calculation Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Configuring Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

I n
Installing Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

l e
Lesson 6: Installing Reporting and Analysis
c
r a
Reporting and Analysis Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration v
 Table of Contents

Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Reporting and Analysis Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Client Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Application Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Database Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Release Compatiblity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Installing AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Installing Financial Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Installing Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Module 3: Product Configuration

Lesson 7: Configuring Shared Services

EPM System Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Configuration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Product Configuration in a Single-Machine Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Product Configuration in a Distributed Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Configuring EPM Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
m y
e
Configuration Tasks for Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
d
c a
Configuring Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Configuring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

e A
Shared Services Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Deploying to Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
l
Configuring User Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
c
r a
Native Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
External Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

O ly
Provisioning Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

l & On
Available Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Provisioning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
a e
Deprovisioning Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
n
t e r
Generating Provisioning Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
s
Importing and Exporting Provisioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
U
I n
Creating Application Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Troubleshooting Shared Services Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

l e
Troubleshooting User Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

c
Running EPM System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

r a
O
vi Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Table of Contents

Lesson 8: Configuring Essbase Services

Configuring Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
EPM System Configurator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Configuring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Post-Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Provisioning Users for Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Essbase Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Provider Services Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Externalizing Users in Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Troubleshooting Essbase Services Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking Server Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Viewing Log Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Running EPM System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Lesson 9: Configuring Planning

Configuring Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Configuring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Deploying to an Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
m y
Configuring Calculation Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

d e
Configuring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

c a
Deploying to an Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Configuring Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
A
Configuring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

e
c l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Deploying to an Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

r a
Configuring Planning Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Creating Product Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
O ly
Defining Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

l & On
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Configuring Smart View and Offline Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

n a e
Enabling and Disabling Smart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

t e r U s
Connecting to a Data Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Taking Forms Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

I n
Troubleshooting Planning Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Reconfiguring Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

l e
Troubleshooting Performance Management Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
c
Troubleshooting Smart View Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

r a Running EPM System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration vii
 Table of Contents

Lesson 10: Configuring Reporting and Analysis

Configuring Financial Reporting and Web Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Configuring Financial Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Deploying to Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Provisioning Users for Reporting and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Reporting and Analysis Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Reporting and Analysis Roles Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Troubleshooting Reporting and Analysis Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Log4j Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Viewing Configuration Error Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Running EPM System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Lesson 11: Configuring Workspace

Configuring Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Configuring the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Deploying to Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Configuring the Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Provisioning Users in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
m y
d e
Troubleshooting Workspace Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Viewing Error Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7

a
EPM System Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
c
Module 4: Post Installation Tasks
e A
Lesson 12: Verifying the Planning Installationc l
r a
O ly
Verifying the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating Applications in Performance Management Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
& On
Adding Dimensions from the Shared Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
l
n a e
Configuring Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Deploying Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

t e r U s
Validating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Creating Essbase Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

I n
Provisioning Users for Planning and Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . 12-17

c l e
User Provisioning for Planning Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
User Provisioning for Dimensions, Data Forms, and Task Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

r aUser Provisioning for Offline Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Accessing Planning in Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19

O
viii Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Table of Contents

Launching Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Opening Planning Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Accessing Planning in Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Connecting to Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Opening Data Forms in Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Accessing Outlines in Adminstration Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Lesson 13: Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Accessing Financial Reporting in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Importing Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Managing Financial Reporting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Exporting Reports to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Accessing Web Analysis in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Using POV Definitions in Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Managing Web Analysis Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Accessing Reporting and Analysis in Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Lesson 14: Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d
Databases, Applications, and Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 e
Backup and Recovery Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

c a
File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Operating System Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
A
Product-Specific Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
e
c l
Running the Sync Native Directory Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Upgrading Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13

r a
About Supported Upgrade Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

O ly
Migrating Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Moving Applications to Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
& On
Upgrading Applications in Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
l
a e
Migrating Data and Metadata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22

n
Module 5: Appendices
t e r U s
I n
Appendix A: Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

c l e
Lifecycle Management (LCM) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

r aMigration on Connected and Disconnected Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Lifecycle Management Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration ix
 Table of Contents

LCM Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

Exploring Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Planning Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Performance Management Architect Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Calculation Manager Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Shared Services Artifacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Viewing and Searching for Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Migrating Applications and Artifacts - Process Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Migration Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Migration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Migrating Directly from One Application to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Migrating Applications to an Intermediary File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Migrating Applications from an Intermediary File to a Destination Application . . A-23
Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Automating Migration Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Accessing and Viewing the Migration Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Accessing and Viewing the Comparison Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Viewing Audit Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

Appendix B: Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
Financial Data Quality Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
d e
c a
Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Operating System and Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
A
Disk Space and RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
e
c l
Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Repository Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

r a
Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Installing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
O ly
Configuring FDM Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
& On
Configuring Web Server Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
l
n a e
Configuring the Task Manager and Application Server Components . . . . . . . . . B-14
Configuring Load Balance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

t e r U s
Configuring Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Application Creation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

I n
Creating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Installing Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
l e
Installing Standard Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
c
Installing the Essbase Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27

r a
Connecting to Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29

O
x Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Preface 0

Welcome to Oracle Hyperion Planning 11.1.1: Installation and

Configuration!
Before you begin, please take a moment to review this section. The
preface presents an overview of the following information:
Course objectives
Structure of the course
Course materials used in the class
Conventions used in the book
Additional resources to enhance your learning
m y
e
Relevant follow-up courses that you might want to attend in the future
d
Course Objectives c a
After completing this course, you should be able to:
e A
c l
Identify the Planning installation requirements

r a
Install Planning and its product components

O ly
Course Structure
l & On
n a e
Oracle Hyperion Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration is a 3-day,
instructor-led training course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and

t e r U s
hands-on exercises. In this course, the instructor presents a topic
conceptually by explaining its purpose, demonstrating how it works, and

I n
then guiding the students through the exercises. Demonstrations and
hands-on exercises reinforce the concepts and skills introduced during

c l e
lectures.

r a
O
 Preface

Course Materials
You use two books in classthe student guide and the activity guide. The instructor may
also give you handouts.

Student Guide
The student guide is designed to be used by students and the instructor during lecture
time. It has 4 modules:
Module 1 describes the Planning architecture, requirements, and product
components.
Module 2 describes the product installation process.
Module 3 describes the product configuration process.
Module 4 describes the post installation tasks.
Each module contains lessons. Each lesson begins with a list of objectives followed by
the presentation of slides and accompanying text. The lesson ends with a summary of
the topics covered in the lesson.
A glossary provides definitions of terms used during the course.
m y
d e
Activity Guide
The activity guide has two sectionsexercises and exercise solutions.
c a
e A
Exercises

c l
A critical part of the learning process is the challenge of completing real tasks associated

r a
with each lesson. Each exercise is an opportunity to apply your new knowledge.

Exercise Solutions O ly
l & On
The exercise solutions present the detailed steps to successfully complete the exercises.

n a e
Conventions
t e r U s
The following text conventions are used in this course book:

I n
Text to be typed, options to be selected, names of files and modules, and menu

l e
selections are displayed in bold type. Examples:

c
r a - Select Clear Profile.

O - Click YES to clear the profile.

xii Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration

 Preface

When available, figures are used to identify an object or task. Example:

Click Edit.

Keyboard shortcuts are displayed as follows: Ctrl+Enter

Alerts are used to direct your attention to different types of information.
NOTE
A note provides related information, common mistakes, or
cautions about the current topic.

TIP
A tip provides information that helps you work more
efficiently.

Additional Resources
Use the following resources to enhance your learning: m y
Hyperion EPM System Installation Start Here
d e
Hyperion EPM System Installation and Configuration Guide
c a
Hyperion EPM System Security Administration Guide
e A
c l
Hyperion EPM System Manual Deployment Guide

r a
Hyperion EPM System Installation and Configuration Troubleshooting Guide

O ly
Hyperion EPM System Upgrade Guide

l & On
Hyperion EPM System Backup and Recovery Guide

a e
Hyperion EPM System Lifecycle Management Guide
n
e r s
Hyperion EPM System SSL Configuration Guide
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration xiii
 Preface

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
xiv Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 M O D U L E 1

Installation Overview 0

Overview
In this module, you describe the Oracle Hyperion Planning architecture and
components.
Lessons in this module include:
Introduction to Planning
Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1

Introduction to Planning 1

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Describe Oracles Enterprise Performance Management System
Describe the main features and architecture of Planning
Describe the Planning product components

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Oracles Enterprise Performance Management

System

EPM Workspace

Performance Management
Applications BIBIApplications
Applications

Business Intelligence Foundation

Fusion Middleware

m y
OL TP & ODS
System s
Data Wareh ou se
Data M art OL AP
SAP, Oracle, Siebel,
Peop leSoft, Cu sto m
Excel
XML

d e
Busin ess
Pro cess

Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

c a
e A
l
Oracles Enterprise Performance Management System
c
r a
Oracles Enterprise Performance Management system is a portfolio of technology and
applications that include category-leading financial performance management
O ly
applications, operational BI applications, BI foundation and tools, and data warehousing.

l & On
It also leverages Oracles Fusion Middleware technologies, such as Oracle Application
Server and Oracle Identity Management.
It has these characteristics:
n a e
t e r U s
PervasiveIt enables all levels of your organization to see information optimized for
their role.
I n
l e
ComprehensiveIt incorporates information from your financial performance
management, operational intelligence, and transactional applications.
c
r a
O
1-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Hot-pluggableIt integrates with any data source, extraction, transformation and

load (ETL) tool, major business application, application server, security
infrastructure, portal technology, front-end and analytical tools, and database.

Performance Management Applications

Oracles performance management applications are a modular suite of integrated
applications that support the entire financial management cycle of goal setting, modeling,
planning, monitoring, analysis, and reporting. Applications include:
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Performance Scorecard, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Strategic Finance, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Planning, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management, Fusion Edition
Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Fusion Edition
m y
Oracle Strategic Operational Planning, Fusion Edition
d e
BI Applications c a
A
Oracle BI applications are pre-built vertical and horizontal analytic applications that
e
c l
enable organizations to gain greater insight and value from a range of data sources and
applications, including Oracle E-Business Suite, PeopleSoft, Siebel (Customer

r a
Relationship Management system), and third party systems such as SAP (Enterprise

O ly
Resource Planning system). Applications include:
Oracle Financial Analytics

l & On
Oracle HR Analytics

n a e
t e r U s
Oracle Order Management and Fulfillment Analytics
Oracle Supply Chain Analytics

I n
Oracle Sales Analytics

l e
Oracle Service Analytics
c
r a
Oracle Contact Center Analytics

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-3
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Oracle Marketing Analytics

Oracle Usage Accelerator Analytics for CRM

Business Intelligence Foundation

The core technology of Oracles EPM System is a highly scalable Business Intelligence
Foundation. This foundation utilizes a common enterprise information model as the
consistent semantic layer. This foundation has three specialized servers to meet your
reporting and analytical needs.
Essbase the leading OLAP Server for building forward-looking analytic applications
BI Server highly scalable federated query engine for aggregating disparate data
sources
Predictive Analytics Oracle Real-Time Decisions a predictive analytics engine for
embedding BI into operational processes

Fusion Middleware
Fusion middleware provides an open, comprehensive, standards-based approach for
deploying service-oriented architectures (SOAs) using Web services, an enterprise
service bus, and Oracle BPEL (Business Process Execution Language) Process
m y
e
Manager. Its portfolio includes products for integration, business process management,
d
databases, and BI; and many other components. Examples include:
c a
business intelligence, and data management; developer tools for applications,

Oracle Application Server (Java application server)

e A
Oracle Coherence (scaling)
c l
r a
Oracle Master Data Management Suite (data management)

O ly
Oracle Collaboration Suite (e-mail and content management)

& On
Oracle Identity and Access Management Suite (identity management)
l
a e
Oracle WebCenter Suite (context-rich user interface with Web 2.0)
n
t e r U s
Oracle SOA Suite (business rules, process deployment, Java development, business
activity monitoring with dashboards and alerts, application integration over the

I n
Internet and across other applications)

l e
Oracle Portal (out-of-the box enterprise portal)

c
r a
O
1-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Planning Overview

Planning has the following features:

Multidimensional data structure
Target setting and bottom-up planning
Iterative planning cycles
Modeling with complex business rules and
allocations
Accessible on the Web or Smart View
Management of the planning cycle
Currency conversion for multicurrency
applications
Metadata and data integration with other
systems m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Planning Overview
c l
r a
Planning is a Web-based budgeting and planning solution that drives collaborative,
event-based, operational planning processes through the organization for a wide range
O ly
of financial and operational needs. Planners have the flexibility to adapt rapidly to

l & On
changes in direction, ensuring that plans are always current, relevant, and functional.
Decision makers and managers can communicate the course of action and collaborate
a e
with budget holders to optimize the planning process.
n
t e
collection and analysis.
r U s
Powered by Essbase, Planning uses a multidimensional data structure for flexible data

I n
Planning also supports driver-based plans that are based on global assumptions, such

l e
as interest rates and head count.

c
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-5
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Planning Product Components

Performance Management Architect

Calculation Manager
Smart View
Offline Planning
Shared Services
Essbase
Essbase Administration Services
Financial Reporting
Workspace

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Planning Product Components
c l
r a
Your organization can access deployed Planning applications through the Web client. To
extend the power and flexibility of Planning, you use it with other Oracle Hyperion
products.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Additional Products

Workforce Planning
Capital Asset Planning
Strategic Finance
Financial Management
Web Analysis
Financial Data Quality Management

Enterprise Performance Management Solutions

Modeling
D ashboar ding and Scorecarding

Plann ing, Budg eting,

a nd Forecasting
Consolidation
and R eporting
m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Additional Products
c l
r a
Several complementary Hyperion products are integrated with Planning, completing the
Enterprise Performance Management solution.
Product O ly
Description
Workforce Planning
l & On
Handle workforce, salary, and compensation planning
Capital Asset Planning
n a e
Plan for new asset purchases and existing asset actions
Strategic Finance

t e r U s
Test financial models, create contingency plans, and form
alternative strategies
Financial Management
I n Consolidate results, reduce the cost of regulatory reporting
compliance, and gain important insights into performance

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-7
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Product Description
Web Analysis Transform data into insightful information through easy-to-
use, highly graphical displays and robust analytics
Financial Data Quality Integrate and validate Planning with financial data from
Management external source systems.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Planning Architecture
c l
r a
Planning is a multitier application that combines the advantages of Essbase (a
multidimensional database) and a relational database to optimize performance and
maintenance.
O ly
Client Tier l & On
n a e
The client tier contains the Financial Reporting Studio client, Workspace, and the Smart
View client.
t e r U s
I n
Planning administrators and users enter data, perform process management, manage
users and security, launch business rules, copy versions, develop data forms, and

l e
perform other administrative tasks on the client tier.
c
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-9
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Server Tier
The server application tier consists primarily of the following:
Java application and Web servers for:
- Shared Services
- Performance Management Architect
- Calculation Manager
- Administration Services
- Provider Services
- Workspace
- Financial Reporting
- Web Analysis
- Planning
NOTE
The Web server can be on a separate machine or on the same machine as the
m y
d e
Planning application server. The Web server enables you to access Planning
applications from a Web client through a Web browser. The Web server uses
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) as the communications protocol.
c a
e A
Services

c l
- Shared Services
r
- Performance Management Architect
a
O ly
- Calculation Manager
- Workspace l & On
n a e
- Essbase
- Essbase Studio
t e r U s
I n
- Financial Reporting

c l e
r a
O
1-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Data Tier
The data tier consists of relational database management systems (RDBMS) and
Essbase. The following products require a repository database:
Shared Services
Performance Management Architect
Calculation Manager
Workspace
Essbase Administration Services
Planning
Planning requires a system database and a database for each deployed application. The
Planning application database is used primarily to store the applications definition. In
addition, the following information is stored in the RDBMS:
Application framework*
Dimensions, dimension members, and properties*
Exchange rates*
m y
Member access (security filters)*
d e
Data form design definitions
c a
Planning units

e A
l
Annotations (planning unit, account, and cell text)
c
Supporting details
r
Process management workflow status
a
O ly
NOTE

l & On
Items with an asterisk (*) are updated to the Essbase databases during
application refreshes.
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-11
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Planning Adapters Overview

Oracle Data Integrator

Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Planning Adapters Overview
c l
r a
You can connect and integrate Planning with any database through the Oracle Data
Integrator (ODI) Adapter for Planning or the Financial Data Quality Management (FDM)
Adapter for Planning.
O ly
l & On
Adapters are predefined software components that communicate with various source

or target system.
n a e
and target applications. Each adapter is programmed to integrate with a specific source

t e r U s
I n
Oracle Data Integrator
After installing ODI, you can perform the following tasks to integrate Planning with an

l e
external data source:
c
r a
O
1-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Defining data serversYou define data servers for connecting to a Planning server in
the Topology Manager. When defining data server connections, you specify a
connection name, the technology used, the server host and port address, username,
and password.
Defining physical and logical schemasYou can define physical schemas
corresponding to a Planning application and logical schemas on which models are
based for each defined data server. After defining physical and logical schemas, you
create a context to link the two schemas.
Reverse-engineering Planning applicationsYou reverse-engineer Planning
applications through the Reverse-engineering Knowledge Module (RKM) to create
an Oracle Data Integrator model that includes a data store for each dimension in the
application. The RKM connects to the applicatio, determined by the logical schema
and context, and imports adata store for each dimension in the application and a data
store called UDA for UDA loading.
Creating interfaces for data storesYou can use the imported data stores as
interface targets for loading data and metadata into a Planning application.
Chaining interfaces into packagesYou can chain interfaces into packages to
consolidate a set of processes that you need to run.
m y
e
Loading data and metadataPlanning applications are structured with dimensions
d
c a
and dimension members. Before you can load data values for members, you must
first load metadata. You can load members only to dimensions that exist in Planning.

e A
You must use a separate interface for each dimension that you load. After loading
dimension members, you must refresh the Essbase database to reflect your
l
changes. After updating the Essbase database, you can run interfaces to load data
c
into Planning.
r a
O ly
l & On
The Oracle Data Integrator uses the following interfaces to perform tasks:
Topology Managerenables you to define server connections.

n a e
stores.
t e r
Designerenables you to define data stores, and load data and metadata into data

U s
I n
Financial Data Quality Management
l e
You can use FDM to feed source-level financial data into Planning. Refer to Appendix B:
c
Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management for more information on:

r a
Running the installation
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-13
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Configuring FDM components

Creating applications
Installing the Planning adapter
Connecting to Planning applications

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Foundation Services Overview
c l
r a
Foundation Services is a modular suite of integrated applications that support a common
workspace, common security and metadata management, enabling a single point of
O ly
maintenance for efficient services management and ownership. The suite provides a

l & On
consistent source of information and change control across the enterprise through
centralized application and application group management, user and group provisioning,
and data integration tools.
n a e
Shared Services
t e r U s
I n
Shared Services integrates Hyperion products to provide user provisioning, lifecycle

c l e
management, and task flow management. It also provides the Shared Services Registry,
a central repository that simplifies product configuration by storing and re-using

a
information for most instaleld Hyperion products.
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-15
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Performance Management Architect

Performance Management Architect is a feature set in Planning. Performance
Management Architect enables you to manage, create, and deploy Oracles Hyperion
applications within one interface.
Using the Data Synchronization feature in Performance Management Architect,
administrators can create data movement synchronizations between Hyperion
applications, create data mappings for reuse, and create flat file and staging area
mappings to import data into Hyperion applications.

Workspace
Workspace is the Web-based common user interface for Hyperion products. It enables
users to work with Hyperion-authored content created with Reporting and Analysis as
well as third-party documents such as Microsoft Word and Excel files. You access
Planning through Workspace.
Key features:
Dynamic HTML (DHTML), zero footprint client
File system paradigm to access content
m y
Interface for common Reporting and Analysis administration task
d e
Access point for Performance Scorecard
c a
A
Support for Reporting and Analysis authoring studios and 3rd party documents

e
Smart View
c l
r a
You can use Smart View to enter and analyze data in Microsoft Office. Smart View

O ly
provides integration with Microsoft Office, not only for Planning but also for Financial
Management, Essbase, Web Analysis, Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, and

performed only once. l & On

Production Reporting. Tasks that previously were repeated across products are now

n a e
t e r
Tight integration with Smart View enables you to perform these tasks:

U s
Import content into Microsoft Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook

I n
Use Office smart tags to add single data values and import reports

l e
Distribute and share Office documents by logging on only once to the data source
c
r a
Expose functions for Financial Management and Essbase Analytics content in Word,
PowerPoint, and Outlook
O
1-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Calculation Manager
Calculation Manager is a module of Performance Management Architect that enables
you to create, validate, and launch complex calculations that you can use in your
Planning application. It provides a graphical interface for ease of use.
Types of objects that can be calculated in Calculation Manager:
Rules contain different calculations that are grouped in components
Rule Sets contain rules that can be calculated simultaneously or sequentially
Components contain formulas, scripts, conditions, ranges, and loops

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-17
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Essbase Overview

Essbase server
Essbase client
Administration Services
Provider Services
Essbase Studio

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Essbase Overview
c l
r a
Essbase is a multithreaded online analytical processing (OLAP) database software using
symmetric multiprocessing hardware platforms. It is based on a Web-deployable, thin-
client architecture.
O ly
Components of Essbase:
l & On
a e
Essbase server acts as a shared resource, handling all data storage, caching,
n
t e r U s
calculations, and data security.
The following Essbase client components enable you to connect to the Essbase

I n
server and perform administrative and analytic tasks on server objects.

l e
- Spreadsheet Add-in is a software program that merges seamlessly with Microsoft

c
Excel. By using Spreadsheet Add-in, you can access Essbase data and perform

r a ad hoc reporting on analytic databases.

O
1-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

- MaxL DDL is a multidimensional database definition language for Essbase. You

make requests to Essbase by using English-like statements rather than
commands.
- Data Mining, an optional product component of Essbase, shows you hidden
relationships and patterns in your data. You can plug in various data mining
algorithms, build models, and apply them to Essbase applications and databases.
Planning uses Essbase to store dimension hierarchies and consolidate data.

Administration Services
Administration Services is the robust, cross-platform framework for managing and
maintaining Essbase. It provides a single point of access for viewing, managing, and
maintaining Essbase servers and Administration servers.
Components of Administration Services:
Administration Services server provides access to Essbase through Essbase
Administration Services Console.
Essbase Administration Services Console provides wizards, editors, dynamic menus
and other tools to help you implement, monitor, and maintain Essbase solutions.
m y
d e
After deploying a Planning application, you can review the resulting Essbase application
in Essbase Administration Services Console.
c a
Provider Services
e A
c l
Provider Services is a middle-tier data source provider to Essbase for Java API, Smart
View, and XMLA clients. Provider Services supports highly concurrent analytical

r a
scenarios and provides scalability and reliability in a distributed Web-enabled enterprise
environment.
O ly
Essbase Studio
l & On
a e
Essbase Studio simplifies cube construction by delivering a single environment for
n
t e r U s
performing tasks related to data modeling, cube designing, and analytic application
construction. With a wizard-driven user interface, Essbase Studio supports modeling of

n
the various data source types from which Essbase applications are typically built.
I
c l e
With a wizard-driven user interface, Essbase Studio supports modeling various data
source types from which Essbase applications are typically built, making it a single point

a
from which all cube-related data modeling can be
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-19
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

performed.
A common metadata repository captures all metadata related to all Essbase applications
allowing the reuse of metadata at the lowest level of granularity. The repository gives
contains the common metadata shared across the various applications enterprise-wide.
Essbase Studio supports lineage tracking through a rich graphical view of the metadata
relationships, allowing users to follow application lineages to their metadata components
and data sources.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Reporting and Analysis Overview
c l
r a
Planning leverages Foundation Services and Reporting and Analysis modules to
integrate data from multiple sources; and provide dashboards, reporting, and analysis.
O ly
You access Reporting and Analysis through Web clients and Windows clients. Web

l & On
clients are built on J2EE technology and consist of the following Web applications:

a e
Workspace Web applicationThis application is the container for Web
n
applications.

t e r U s
Shared Services Web applicationThis application is a foundation for Hyperion

I n
products. You can access Shared Services through its own Web interface.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-21
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Windows clients consist of the following applications:

Authoring studiosEach reporting tool provides a Windows application for
developing specialized reports.
Administration Services ConsoleEssbase provides management and data
analysis engines for its multidimensional database. You can access Essbase through
Administration Services and the Administration Services Console.
The following table lists Reporting and Analysis modules and their features:

Module Features
Financial Reporting Specialized financial reporting module with predefined formatting
and built-in financial intelligence that enables users to quickly
assemble and publish report books for management control and
regulatory fillings
Web Analysis Front-end analysis tool that enables users to explore business
data for growth and profit opportunities, uncover emerging
problems, and test solutions before using them
Essbase Essbase Analytics: Enterprise analytic infrastructure for financial
analysis, spending analysis, customer behavior analysis, product
profitability, or workforce analysis
m y
scalability to support enterprise analysis
d e
Aggregate Storage Mode: Real-time analytical engine with data

Interactive Reporting
c a
Query and reporting tool with Web-enabled dashboard interface
and ability to secure content based on different users
SQR Production Reporting A
Reporting tool that generates and manages large-volume
e
c l
reports, and allows users to distribute reports to diverse
audiences over the Web

r a
O ly
In this class, you install Financial Reporting and Web Analysis.

Financial Reporting
l & On
a e
Oracles Hyperion products support multiple types of reporting and analysis through a
n
t e r U s
personalized, intuitive, and interactive thin-client workspace.
With Financial Reporting, you can graphically design and present analytic data. You can

I n
design traditional financial report formats, such as cash management reports, profit and

l e
loss statements, and balance sheets. You can also design nontraditional formats for
financial or analytic data that includes text and graphics.
c
r a
Key features:

O
1-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Flexible range of output options

Scalable, cross-platform, server-based report generation
Graphical, object-based, report creation with simultaneous access to multiple
Hyperion data sources
Objects that are reusable across multiple reports
Book creation for similar reports
Dynamic scheduling that enables automated reporting

Web Analysis
Web Analysis provides a Web interface for advanced report design. The interface offers
drag-and-drop tools to create personalized reports for a broad range of analytic
applications, such as sales analysis, product profitability, key performance management,
and dashboards. Web Analysis interacts with data stores from Essbase, Financial
Management, Planning, and relational databases.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 1-23
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 1 Introduction to Planning

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Describe Oracles Enterprise Performance Management System

Describe the main features and architecture of Planning
Describe the Planning product components

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
1-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 2

Planning the Installation 2

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Prepare software installation requirements
Prepare hardware installation requirements
Describe the EPM System Installer
Create Oracle users

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Installation Overview

Installation Planning checklist

Preparing the work area
Obtaining licenses

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Installation Overview
c l
r a
Each Hyperion product follows a set of installation requirements and procedures. To
assist you in determining your requirements, you can refer to the following
documentation:
O ly
l & On
Hyperion EPM System Installation Start Here

a e
Hyperion EPM System Installation and Configuration Guide
n
e r s
Hyperion EPM System Security Administration Guide
t U
n
Hyperion EPM System Manual Deployment Guide
I
c l e
Hyperion EPM System Installation and Configuration Troubleshooting Guide
Hyperion EPM System Upgrade Guide

r a
Hyperion EPM System Backup and Recovery Guide
O
2-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Hyperion EPM System Lifecycle Management Guide

Hyperion EPM System SSL Configuration Guide

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-3
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Installation Planning Checklist

Preparing the work area

Obtaining third-party licenses
Preparing software
Gathering required documentation
Preparing the hardware
Preparing databases
Preparing the security infrastructure
Setting up Java application servers
and Web servers
Resolving ports
Preparing for product configuration
m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Installation Planning Checklist
c l
r a
Use the Pre-Installation Planning checklist to prepare for installing Hyperion products. To
ensure a smoother, faster installation, Oracle recommends that you review the checklist

O ly
at least one week prior to installation. If your company is working with a consultant,

l & On
Oracle recommends reviewing the checklist several weeks prior to installation.
Refer to Chapter 5, Installation Planning Checklist in the Hyperion EPM System

n a e
Installation Start Here Guide.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Preparing the Work Area
c l
a
Complete these tasks to prepare the work area before the installation consultants arrive:
r
O ly
Ensure that the work area has a direct connection to the internet outside the
corporate firewall

l & On
Verify that the workstation can connect to Oracles e-Delivery site

n a e
Obtain license keys for third-party products, such as Java application servers.

Obtaining Licenses t e r U s
I n
Some third-party products require license keys or license files. Requesting and receiving

l e
a license key can take several days.

c
r a
Software that may require licenses:
Operating systems
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-5
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Database repositories
Java application servers
Web servers
Microsoft Office
Adobe Acrobat Distiller 6.0
For Java application servers, consider which type of license works best for your
organization. For example, you might not need a license for the highest level of
functionality; a license for a lower level of functionality might meet your needs.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Client Requirements
c l
components. r a
This topic covers the software and hardware requirements of Hyperion client

O ly
Operating System and Processors
l & On
a e
The following operating systems are supported:

n
Operating System
t e r U s Notes

I n
Oracle Enterprise Linux 4.0 5.0 Reporting and Analysis supports only the x86
processor.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-7
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Operating System Notes

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4.0.x 5.0.x For Interactive Reporting, only the HTML
(includes Advanced Server and Advanced client is supported; the plug-in client is not
Platform) supported.
Windows:
Windows Vista
Windows XP Professional SP2
Windows 2003 SP1
Windows 2000 Professional SP4

For Windows, a minimum of x86, x64 (1.6 GHz) processor speed is required.

Disk Space and RAM

Disk space and RAM requirements are approximate. The installation program calculates
the required disk space, based on your installation choices.
The recommended minimum RAM requirement for all clients is 1 GB. The following table
lists the minimum disk space requirements per product family component for client
machines.
m y
Product Family Component Disk Space d e
Foundation Services Common Client Components
c
200 MB a
Smart View for Office

e A
50 MB

Architect
c l
Performance Management 10 MB

Essbase Services
r a
Runtime Client 75 MB

O ly
Administration Services Console 150 MB

l & On
Integration Services 45 MB

n a e
Essbase Studio Console 40 MB
Financial Performance
Management Applications

t e r Offline Planning

U s 140 MB

I n
Reporting and Analysis Financial Reporting Studio
Interactive Reporting Studio
200 MB
350 MB

c l e Web Analysis Studio 20 MB

Ora
Data Management FDM Workbench 510 MB

2-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration

 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Disk space does not include the common client components installed on the machine
with Foundation Services.

Screen Resolution
Oracle Hyperion products are optimized for a minimum screen resolution of 1024 x 768.

Third-Party Software
The following third-party software are required:

Supported Software Notes

Adobe Acrobat Reader 6.0 or later Required for viewing PDF files
One of the following: Microsoft Excel is required to use Smart View
and Offline Planning
Microsoft Office 2007
Microsoft Office 2003
Microsoft Office XP (2002)
Microsoft SQL Server (2005 SP1 or 2000
SP3a) Analysis Services client
Required for Financial Reporting and Web
Analysis

m y
d
To connect to Microsoft SSAS 2005 e
c a
databases, you must install the SSAS
Connectivity Client on any Financial

e A
Reporting Client or Financial Reporting server
or Web Analysis Web Application machine.

c l The SSAS client and server versions must

match.

r a
Web Browsers
A Web browser is required for: O ly
Shared Services
l & On
n a e
Workspace

t e r U s
Performance Management Architect

I n
Reporting and Analysis

l
Planning
c e
a
Financial Management
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-9
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Performance Scorecard
FDM
Profitability and Cost Management

Supported Web Browsers Notes

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 7.0.x The following products do not support Firefox:
Firefox 2.0.x Smart View
FDM
Data Relationship Management

Set your browser to enable JavaScript and cookies. Storing cookies on your computer is
recommended; at a minimum, allow per-session (not stored) cookies.

Runtime Clients
Some Oracle Hyperion software require runtime clients of other Hyperion products or
third-party software. The versions of both Hyperion runtime client and server must
m y
match.
d e
c a
Clients

e A
Runtime Client Required
Financial Reporting
Interactive Reporting
c l Microsoft SQL Server 2000 SP3a Analysis
Services

SQR Production Reporting

r a Microsoft SQL Server 2005 SP1 Analysis
Services
Web Analysis
O ly
Financial Reporting
Web Analysis
l & On The version of the Financial Management
ADM driver and the version of Financial

n a e Management that is used for Financial

Reporting and Web Analysis must match.
Web Analysis
t e r U s Java Plug-in: 1.5.0_12 and 1.4.2_15
Planning
I n Essbase runtime client (installed
automatically)

c l e
Java Runtime Environments are installed automatically with the products that require it.

r a
O
2-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Server Requirements
c l
r a
This topic describes the system requirements for each Hyperion product family. Where a
range of releases is specified, it indicates that all releases within the specified range are
supported or required.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-11
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Operating System and Processor

The following operating systems and corresponding processors are supported:

Operating System Processor Notes

Windows 2003 SP1 x86-32
Windows 2000 Server SP4 32-bit
Windows 2003 SP1 (Server Itanium 2 Not supported for:
Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based
64-bit Shared Services
Systems)
Performance Management
Architect Dimension Server
Workspace

Windows 2003 SP1 (Server x86-64 Applies only to 64-bit Essbase.

Enterprise x64 Edition) Other Essbase component
64-bit
binaries are 32-bit.

Financial Reporting, Interactive

Reporting, and Core Services
binaries are 32-bit.
m y
d e
c a
Not supported for Performance
Management Architect Dimension

e
Server.
A
c l
r a
Administration Services, Provider Services, and Planning only support the listed 64-bit
operating systems if Tomcat is used as the application server.
O ly
For Essbase Services, refer to the Hyperion EPM System Installation Start Here Guide

l & On
for a complete listing of 32-bit and 64-bit client-server compatibility.

n a e
Disk Space and RAM

t e r U s
Disk space and RAM requirements are for the applications. These requirements are

I n
approximate and do not include additional possible requirements on the machine, such
as extra space needed for a VMware image. The installation program calculates the

l e
required disk space, based on your installation choices. Disk space estimates include
c
documentation help files (if applicable) and Hyperion common components.

r a
O
2-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Foundation Services

Component Disk Space RAM

Shared Services Server 400 MB 1.5 GB
Workspace 1 GB 1 GB
Performance Management Architect 50 MB 1 GB for Dimension
Server
512 MB each for Web
Tier and Data
Synchronizer
Calculation Manager 20 MB 256 MB

Shared Services requires more disk space based on OpenLDAP (Native Directory)
usage for provisioning (depending on how often you back up OpenLDAP) and on
Lifecycle Management usage. If you are using Lifecycle Management functionality, it is
recommended that you significantly increase disk space due to storage of application
data in the Shared Services file system.

m y
Essbase Services

d e
Component Disk Space RAM
c a
Essbase Server
Essbase API
1 GB

e
20 MB A1 GB
256 MB
Essbase Administration Server
c l500 MB 32 MB multiplied by the

r a number of concurrent
users
Provider Services
O ly 340 MB 340 MB
Essbase Studio Server
l & On 60 MB 256 MB

n a e
For Essbase Administration Server, allow extra disk space for data files and outline files

t e r U s
that are copied during data loading and outline editing.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-13
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Reporting and Analysis

Component Disk Space RAM

Financial Reporting 200 MB 1GB
Web Analysis 1 GB 1GB

Financial Management Applications - Planning

Component Disk Space RAM

Planning 32 GB (10 GB 4 GB
available)

For Planning, additional disk space is required for data.

Third-Party Software
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 is required for Performance Management Architect and is
installed automatically by Oracle's Hyperion EPM System Installer, if not already
installed.
m y
Financial Reporting requires any of the following distillers:
d e
Adobe Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (See your account manager)
c a
AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.1 or GNU Ghostscript 7.0.6

e A
Financial Reporting and Web Analysis require the use of SAP JCO 2.1.7 if you plan to
use NetWeaver BI and SAP BW 7.0
c l
r a
For Microsoft SQL Server, you need MS SQL Server (2005 SP1 or 2000 SP3a) Analysis

O ly
Services. The SSAS client and server versions must match.

& On
For SQL grid relational connectivity with Web Analysis, Merant drivers are required.

l
Repository Databases
n a e
e r
A database is required for:
t U s
Shared Services
I n
c l e
Workspace
Performance Management Architect

r a
Calculation Manager
O
2-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Administration Services
Planning (system)
Each deployed Planning application

Java Application and Web Servers

If an application contains more than 500 users and 10,000 measures, deploy to a Java
application server cluster for increased scalability.
Java application servers and Web servers are required for:
- Shared Services
- Performance Management Architect
- Calculation Manager
- Workspace
- Administration Services
- Provider Services

m y
- Financial Reporting
- Web Analysis d e
- Planning c a
e A
NOTE
c l
r a
The Planning Web server can be on a separate machine or on the same machine

O ly
as the Planning application server. The Web server enables you to access
Planning applications from a Web client through a Web browser. The Web server
& On
uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) as the communications protocol.
l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-15
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Preparing the Required Software

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Preparing the Required Software
c l
a
To prepare the required software for installation, perform the following tasks:
r
O ly
Download product installation assemblies from the Oracle E-Delivery site
(http://edelivery.oracle.com).

l & On
Review the Media Pack Readme section on the Hyperion Performance Management
a e
and BI page for your platform of Oracle E-Delivery to see which products are
n
t e r U s
required or optional for use with your products.
Ensure that the products meet the release compatibility requirements of Oracle

I n
Hyperion software. The release compatibility information for each product will be

c l e
discussed in later lessons.
Validate that all third-party product versions meet system requirements.

r a
O
2-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Foundation Services
The following table lists the required Foundation Services product software:

Required Software Required / Not Required For

Shared Services Required for all products
Required only if using external authentication for:
Data Integration Management
Data Relationship Management
FDM
Workspace Required for all products except for:
Shared Services
Strategic Finance
Data Integration Management
Data Relationship Management
FDM

Performance Management Architect Required only for:

m y
Planning

d e
Calculation Manager

c
Profitability and Cost Management a
e A
Essbase Services
c l
The following table lists the required Essbase Services product software:

r a
Required Software
O ly
Required For
Shared Services

l & On Required only if using external authentication for:

Essbase

n a e Administration Services

t e r U s Essbase Studio
Smart Search
Essbase
I n Administration Services

c l e Integration Services
Essbase Studio

r a Smart Search

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-17
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Required Software Required For

Administration Services Provider Services
Essbase Studio
Provider Services Smart View

Reporting and Analysis

Shared Services and Workspace are required for all Reporting and Analysis
components.

Planning
The following lists the required product components for Planning:
Shared Services
Workspace
Essbase Server and Administration Server components
Performance Management Architectoptional, if you are using Classic Application
Administration
m y
Calculation Manager
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Preparing the Hardware

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Preparing the Hardware
c l
a
Consider the following guidelines in preparing your hardware:
r
O ly
Before you configure Hyperion products, you need to know whether you will deploy in a
clustered environment.

l & On
Plan your deployment layoutdetermine whether you will deploy in a clustered
environment
n a e
e r s
Ensure that the necessary hardware is available for your deployment architecture
t U
and meet system requirements

I n
Prepare each server for the Hyperion products installationupdate server software

l e
as needed (service packs, hotfixes) and disable unnecessary services

c
r a
If applicable, ensure that the load balancing or failover is tested and ready prior to
starting the installation

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-19
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Check network bandwidth and latency for distant sites and ensure that minimum
requirements are met
Synchronize server time to avoid authentication errors that result in user access
problems between the Hyperion application servers
Arrange for full backup of all servers and databases after the installation
Arrange for periodical backup procedures for all servers and databases
Resolve potential firewall problems

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Preparing Databases
c l
using a supported RDBMS. r a
Before you install and configure most Hyperion products, you must create a database

O ly
For ease of deployment and simplicity, you can use one database repository for all

l & On
products (with the exceptions noted below) or use a separate database repository for

a e
each product or product family.

n
t e r U s
You need to create unique databases for each of the following:
Performance Management Architect interface data source

I n
Extended Analytics for Financial Management

c l e
Planning applications

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-21
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

When you configure multiple products at one time using EPM System Configurator, one
database is configured for all selected products. If you want to use a different database
for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.
Refer to the Planning Architecture topic in Lesson 1 for the list of Hyperion products that
require a database repository.

Oracle Database
Oracle database versions 9.2.0.5 up to 11.1.0.6.0 are supported. Considerations when
using an Oracle database:
The database must be created using Unicode Transformation Format UTF-8
encoding (character set) for the best compatibility with non-ASCII character sets. Use
of UTF-8 is required if you need multi-lingual support (multi character set support).
Install Oracle database client on the same machine as the Performance
Management Architect Dimension server.
To share one Oracle instance among installations on separate computers, create an
Oracle user for each installation (unless you are using load balancing).
Oracle user IDs should have the following roles: CONNECT, RESOURCE, CREATE,
m y
CREATE TRIGGER, DROP TRIGGER, MODIFY TRIGGER, CREATE
PROCEDURE, ALTER SESSION, ALTER SYSTEM.
d e
c a
If your database resides on a remote computer, create a Net Service Name that
enables the product to connect to the remote database.

e A
use localhost as a server name.
c l
Use the global database server name when specifying locations and paths. Do not

r a
Microsoft SQL Server
O ly
using MS SQL Server:
l & On
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 SP3a up to 2005 SP1 are supported. Considerations when

n a e
When setting security properties for the database, select the SQL Server and

e r s
Windows Authentication option.
t U
I n
Database users must be assigned privileges to add, modify, and delete these
database objects: TABLES, INDEXES, VIEWS, PROCEDURES,

l e
ROLES/AUTHORITIES, SEQUENCES, TRIGGERS, SESSION.

c
r a
The Reporting and Analysis repository database user cannot be an administrator or a
user with the System Administrators role.

O
2-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

IBM DB2
IBM DB2 9.2x is supported by all Hyperion products except FDM and Data Relationship
Management. Considerations when using IBM DB2:
When installing IBM DB2, clear the OLAP Starter Kit option.
For Performance Management Architect, ensure that your DB2 database is installed
on a different computer, and not the Dimension Server machine where the DB2 9
Runtime Client and DB2 .NET Data Provider must be installed.
For Reporting and Analysis, ensure that the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler is
installed on the computers on which you install services. For Core Services and Job
Factory Service, if you use an IBM DB2 RDBMS and Reporting and Analysis
Services is installed on a separate machine, create a client connection to the
Reporting and Analysis database using the Client Application Enabler.
For Web Analysis, configure DB2 to use JDBC 2.0 drivers. Ensure that the IBM DB2
Client Application Enabler is installed.
For IBM DB2, the database must be created using Unicode Transformation Format
UTF-8 encoding (character set) for the best compatibility with non-ASCII character
y
sets. Use of UTF-8 is required if you need multi-lingual support (multi character set
m
support).

d e
Use the Client Configuration Assistant to set up a database alias that enables the

c a
Hyperion product to connect to the database. Be sure to select Register this
Database for ODBC and As a System Data Source options.

e A
c l
Database users must be assigned privileges to add, modify, and delete these
database objects: TABLES, INDEXES, VIEWS, PROCEDURES,

a
ROLES/AUTHORITIES, SEQUENCES, TRIGGERS, SESSION.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-23
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Preparing the Security Infrastructure

User Authentication
Security API
Native Directory
External Directories
Administrator Accounts
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Preparing the Security Infrastructure
c l
a
Perform the following actions to prepare your security infrastructure for the installation:
r
O ly
Collect the information needed to configure external user directories in Shared
Services.

l & On
For each server, prepare a user account with Administrator rights. The installation
a e
can be a local administrator account.
n
e
Create domain accounts
t r U s
are using. I n
Prepare a service account for external authentication against the user directory you

c l e
If you are using secure communication, ensure availability of Secure Sockets Layer

r a
(SSL) certificates for all components. Oracle recommends using SSL for Hyperion
product installations.

O
2-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

User Authentication
User authentication enables single sign-on functionality across Oracle's Hyperion
products by validating the login information of each user to determine authenticated
users. User authentication, along with product-specific authorization, grants the user
access to Oracle's Hyperion products.Authorization is granted through provisioning.
User directories refer to any corporate user and identity management system compatible
with Shared Services. Oracle's Hyperion products are supported on a large number of
user directories.

Security API
The Security Application Programming Interface (Security API) is the main interface to
validate users and interpret user access to Oracle's Hyperion products.

Native Directory
Native Directory refers to the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)-enabled
user directory that Shared Services uses to support provisioning.

External Directories
The following are supported external user directories:
m y
d e
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)-enabled user directories, such as

Directory Server) c a
Oracle Internet Directory, Sun Java System Directory Server (formerly SunONE

Microsoft Active Directory

e A
Windows NT LAN Manager (NTLM)
c l
SAP Provider
r a
O ly
Custom-built user directories that support LDAP version 3
Relational databases
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-25
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Setting up Java Application Servers

and Web Servers

Java Application Servers Web S ervers

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
l
Setting Up Java Application Servers and Web Servers
c
server must be installed. r a
Before you configure Planning and its components, a Java application server and Web

O ly
A Java application server and Web server is required for:
Shared Services
l & On
n a e
Performance Management Architect

t
Calculation Manager
e r U s
Workspace
I n
l e
Administration Services
c
a
Provider Services
r
O
2-26 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Financial Reporting
Web Analysis
Planning

Java Application Servers

You can use any of the following Java application servers:
Oracle 10g (10.1.3.3.0 and higher)includes support for Oracle Application Server
Single-SignOn, for Workspace only
Apache Tomcat 5.5.17
BEA WebLogic 9.2
IBM WebSphere 6.1.0.7 - 6.1.0x

Oracle 10g
To use Oracle 10g as your Java application server, accept all default settings. The typical
Oracle 10g installation uses its own internal Web server.

m y
e
NOTE
Oracle 10g can only be deployed manually.

a d
Apache Tomcat A c
l e
Oracle supports Apache Tomcat application server, which is provided on the installation

c
media for use with the deployment of Hyperion products. Oracle does not support

r a
Apache Tomcat application server for use outside Hyperion product installations.

BEA WebLogic O ly
& On
When you install WebLogic as your Java application server, accept all default settings.
l
a e
The typical WebLogic installation uses its own internal Web server.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-27
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

NOTE
If BEA WebLogic application server is not installed in BEA_HOME, Hyperion
products cannot be automatically deployed to WebLogic using EPM System
Configurator. Use the manual deployment option to create the Web archive and
use the WebLogic application deployment tool to deploy the application to the
required instance.

IBM WebSphere
When you install IBM WebSphere as your Java application server, follow the IBM
installation instructions and accept all default settings. The typical WebSphere
installation includes the IBM HTTP server as the Web server.
Considerations when installing IBM Websphere:
If you run multiple products on WebSphere, use the same account to install, deploy,
and run the product applications.
If WebSphere is installed as root, you must grant Write permissions to the
WebSphere installation folders so that EPM System Configurator can make required
m y
modifications to WebSphere configuration files.
d e
c a
Hyperion products cannot deploy to WebSphere if the WebSphere installation path
contains spaces. Change the installation path so that no spaces are included.

e A
Web Servers
c l
r a
You can use an internal Web server provided with your Java application server, or an
external Web server. The following Web Servers are supported

O ly
Oracle HTTP Server 10g (10.1.3.3.0 and higher)
Apache Web Server 2.0.61
l & On
IIS 6.0 (Windows 2003)
n a e
e r s
To use Performance Management Architect, you must ensure that IIS is installed on the
t U
Dimension Server.
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-28 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Default Ports
c l
r a
During configuration, you can change the default numbers. If an error message similar to
port already in use or bind error is displayed, a port number conflict might exist. Each
O ly
port number must be unique. After changing the port number in the application server

l & On
console, run EPM System Configurator, select the manual deployment option on the
application server panel, and provide the new port number to update the Shared
Services Registry.
n a e
t e r U s
The default ports for Hyperion products are as follows:
Shared Services
I n
c l e
- 28080 - Listen port
- 28081 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat

r a
- 28082 - AJP connector port

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-29
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

- 28000 - Remote Authentication module

- 28089 - OpenLDAP
Workspace
- 6790 to 6810 - EPM Foundation Services
- 19000 - Web Server
- 80 - MS IIS
- 45000 - Listen port
- 45001 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat
- 45002 - AJP connector port
Performance Management Architect
- 19091 - Listen port
- 19092 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat
- 19092 - AJP connector port

m y
- 19101 - Listen port for Data Synchronizer
- 19102 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat for Data Synchronizer d e
- 19103 - AJP connector port for Data Synchronizer
c a
- 49500 - Server Manager
e A
- 49501 - Process Manager
c l
- 49502 - Event Subscription
r a
- 49503 - Event Manager O ly
- 49504 - Job Manager
l & On
a e
- 51000 to 51999 - Engine instances
n
Calc Manager
t e r U s
n
- 8500 - Listen port
I
c l e
- 8502 - AJP connector port
Financial Reporting

r a
- 8200 - Listen port
O
2-30 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

- 8201 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat

- 8202 - AJP connector port
- 8299 - Communication service
Web Analysis
- 16000 - Listen port
- 16001 - Shutdown port for Apache Tomcat
- 16002 - AJP connector port
Planning
- 8300 - Listen port
FDM Ports
- 135 - App Server
- 137 to 139, 445 - File sharing
- 135 - Firewall

m y
- 80 - HTTP

d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-31
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

EPM System Installer Overview

You use the EPM System Installer to install, configure, and

deploy Oracle Hyperion products.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
EPM System Installer Overview
c l
r a
You can install Hyperion products using EPM System Installer in any of the following
ways: using the graphical user interface, using the console mode interface, or with no
O ly
interaction using a silent mode installation response file.

l & On
EPM System Configurator provides the following tasks for configuration and

a e
reconfiguration of Hyperion products:

n
t e r U s
Product option activationselect the product features that you are authorized to use.
Shared Services registrationselect to use Shared Services to provision and share

I n
users among Hyperion product applications.

l e
Common settingsselect to display the Common Settings panel once on each

c
machine you configure.

r a
O
2-32 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Shared Services (Foundation) Database configurationselect to specify the

database used for Oracle's Shared Services Registry.
Database configuration for productsselect to specify the database used to store
and retrieve application data.
Application server deploymentseelct to deploy the application automatically to a
Java application server.
Product-specific configuration tasks for products that require it.
Not all tasks are required for all products.

Installation Types
For each type of installation, you can choose whether to install Hyperion products by tier,
or by individual component.
Select Choose components by tier if you want to install all the product components
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location and
the products to install. If you want more control over which services and components
are installed for each product component,
Select Choose components individually if you want more control over which servicesm y
and components are installed for each product component.
d e
To install Hyperion products: c a
e A
1. Double-click installTool.cmd in the root folder to which you extracted the EPM
System Installer files.
c l
r a
2. Review and complete each panel of EPM System Installer, clicking Next to move to
the next panel.
O ly
l & On
3. Perform one of the following actions:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator.

n a e
t e r
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

U s
Silent Installations
I n
Silent installations automate the installation process so you can install Hyperion products
l e
on multiple computers without manually specifying installation settings on each machine.
c
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-33
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

To install Hyperion products on multiple computers using the same installation options,
record your installation settings, saving installation options in a response file. You can
then run a silent installation from the command line, using the installation options that
were saved in the response file.

To record installation settings and run a silent installation:

1. From a command line, navigate to the directory that contains EPM System Installer.
2. Enter the command: installTool.cmd|sh -record <filename> , where
<filename> includes an absolute path or file name.
EPM System Installer launches.
3. Proceed through EPM System Installer, specifying the options you want to record.
Installation options are recorded in the response file, which is in
XML format. You can modify the response file later to change
installation options.
4. Copy the response file to the machine on which you want to run the installation. You
can also copy the file to a network drive that is accessible from the machines on
which you want to install.
m y
5. From the command line, enter the command: installtool.cmd|sh -silent
d e
<filename>
The installation runs in the background. c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-34 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installation Sequence
c l
a
The EPM System Installer enables you to:
r
O ly
Install multiple products in the correct order.

& On
Launch the EPM System Configurator to configure and deploy multiple components.
l
n a e
If you are configuring multiple products on a single machine simultaneously, EPM
System Configurator configures them in the correct order.

t e r U s
If you are configuring multiple products across a distributed environment, configure

I n
Shared Services first. Next, make sure Shared Services is up and running before
configuring additional products. Proceed by configuring products installed on the same

l e
machine as Shared Services. Then, for each machine in the deployment, configure

c
Hyperion products one at one time for the products installed on the machine.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-35
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
Classroom Configuration
c l
r a
The diagram displays the configuration of each workstation in the classroom. The class
uses VMWare Workstation to simulate a distributed environment. The servers are
O ly
divided into virtual machines that belong to a private network.

l & On
Oracle 11g and Microsoft Active Directory are installed on HypDB. HypDB serves as the
domain controller.

n a e
t e r U s
In this class, you install Hyperion product components required for Planning, as well as
Financial Reporting and Web Analysis.

I n
c l e
r a
O
2-36 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

User Management

trnadm in

hypadmin plnadmin

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
User Management
c l
a
The following administrators are used in this class:
r
Adminstrator Role
O ly Password
trnadmin
& On
Operating System logon user
l
hyperion
hypadmin
a e
System Administrator

n
hyperion
plnadmin

t e r U s
Planning Administrator hyperion

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 2-37
 Module 1 Installation Overview
Lesson 2 Planning the Installation

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Prepare software installation requirements

Prepare hardware installation requirements
Describe the EPM System Installer
Create Oracle users

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
2-38 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 M O D U L E 2

Product Installation 2

Overview
In this module, you install Planning and its required components.
Lessons in this module include:
Installing Foundation Services
Installing Essbase Services
Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect
Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 3

Installing Foundation Services 3

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Install Shared Services
Install Workspace

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Foundation Services Installation Overview
c l
r a
Workspace and Shared Services are part of EPM Foundation Services. Performance
Management Architect, Calculation Manager, and Smart View, also part of Foundation
O ly
Services, are discussed in more detail in later lessons.

l & On
In this lesson, you learn about Shared Services and Workspace installations.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

Release Compatibility

If you upgrade EPM Foundation Services to release 11.1.1, you

must verify that all other product components are compatible.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Release Compatibility
c l
r a
As a general rule, if you upgrade any Oracle Hyperion product to Release 11.1.1, you
must also upgrade the following Foundation Services components to release 11.1.1:
Shared Services O ly
Workspace
l & On
n a e
Performance Management Architect

t
Calculation Manager
e r U s
I n
Foundation Services 11.1.1 components are backward-compatible with previous

c l
Essbase
e
versions of the following Planning components:

r a
Planning
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 3-3
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

Workforce Planning
Capital Expense Planning
The following table lists the compatibility between Foundation Services components and
other Hyperion product components:

Performance
Shared Services Workspace Management
Product Component 11.1.1 11.1.1 Architect 11.1.1
Essbase versions 11.1.1 NA 11.1.1
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x
Administration Services 11.1.1 NA NA
versions
9.3.x
9.2.x
Provider Services versions 11.1.1 NA NA
9.3.x
9.2.x
m y
Essbase Studio versions 11.1.1

d e
Planning versions 11.1.1
9.3.x
11.1.1
9.3.x
11.1.1

c
9.3.x a
9.2.x

e
9.2.x
A
Financial Reporting versions 11.1.1
9.3.x
c l 11.1.1 NA

r
9.2.x a
Web Analysis versions
O ly
11.1.1 11.1.1 NA

l & On
9.3.x

n a e
9.2.x
FDM versions

t e r U
11.1.1
s NA NA

NA = Not Applicable
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Shared Services
c l
operations: r a
During a Shared Services installation, EPM System Installer performs the following

O ly
Creates directories and subdirectories under the location specified during installation

l & On
Installs Hyperion common components to <HYPERION_HOME>/common

n a e
Adds shortcuts to Start Menu

t e r
Installs these components:
U s
I n
- OpenLDAP database (stores the security-services-related data)

l e
- Shared Services server
c
r a
- Shared Services Help

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 3-5
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

- Remote Authentication Module

The following table describe the components and services installed on each tier (Client,
Web, and Services) for Shared Services, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

None Shared Services Web application OpenLDAP Service
HRAM (Windows only, installed
automatically)
None Assemblies: Assemblies:
sharedServices sharedServices

To install Shared Ser vices:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.

m
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
y
it, and then click Next.
d e
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all the necessary
c a
products on this machine.

e A
l
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
c
a
Select New installation if Shared Services is not installed.
r
O ly
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Shared Services is
already installed.

l & On
Select Re-install this release if this version of Shared Services is already installed

a e
and want to re-install it.
n
t e r U s
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

I n
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location

l e
and the products to install.

c
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services

r a and components are installed for each product component.

O
3-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

6. Select Foundation > Shared Services > Shared Services Web Application and OpenLDAP
service, and click Next.
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Shared
Services.
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 3-7
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

Installing Workspace

During a Workspace installation, the following are installed:

Work spa ce Web portlets S erv er components

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Installing Workspace
c l
r a
During a Workspace installation, Workspace files are installed in
<HYPERION_HOME>/products/Foundation/workspace.
O ly
Installation considerations for Workspace:

l & On
The Workspace Web server and application server must be installed on the same
a e
machine where Workspace is installed.
n
e r s
If you want to have the Web server and the Web application server on separate
t U
machines, you must perform manual configuration steps.

I n
c l e
r a
O
3-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

The following table describe the components and services installed on each tier (Client,
Web, and Services) for Workspace, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

None Workspace Web application and Workspace Services and common
portlets libraries
None Assemblies: Assemblies:
biplus_workspace_webapp workspace_configlibs
workspace_configlibs biplus_core_services
biplus_portlets_webapp biplus_migration_utility

To install Workspace:
1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites, and click Next to continue the installation.
3. Accept the default for Hyperion Home, and click Next.
m y
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
d e
Select New installation if Workspace is not nstalled.

c a
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Workspace is already
installed.
e A
c l
Select Re-install this release if this version of Workspace is already installed and you
want to re-install it.
r a
O ly
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

l & On
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
a e
and the products to install.
n
t e r U s
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.

I n
6. Select Foundation > Workspace, and click Next.

l e
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
c
r aBack and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 3-9
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Workspace.

Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Install Shared Services

Install Workspace

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 3-11
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 3 Installing Foundation Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
3-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 4

Installing Essbase Services 4

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Install Essbase client and Essbase server
Install Administration Services
Install Provider Services
Install Essbase Studio

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Essbase Services Installation Overview

Essbase server
Essbase client
Administration Services
Provider Services
Essbase Studio

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Essbase Services Installation Overview
c l
r a
In this lesson, you learn about Essbase Services installations. During installation, EPM
System Installer installs components and services for the Essbase products you select
O ly
and creates Start menu items under All Users.

l & On
Essbase is the business analysis server technology that provides an environment for

applications.
n a e
rapidly developing custom analytic and enterprise performance management

t e r U s
Planning requires the installation of Essbase and Administration Services. Essbase

n
Provider Services is required to support Smart View for Office.
I
c l e
Planning does not require the installation of Essbase Integration Services

r a
O
4-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Release Compatibility

If you upgrade Essbase Services to release 11.1.1, you must

verify that all other product components are compatible.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Release Compatibility
c l
other Hyperion product components: r a
The following table lists the compatibility between Foundation Services components and

O ly
l & On Administration Provider
Essbase
Studio
Compatible Product
Component
n a e
Essbase
11.1.1
Services
11.1.1
Services
11.1.1
Services
11.1.1

t e
Shared Services versionsr U s
11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
Workspace versions
I n NA NA NA NA

l e
Performance Management
Architect versions

c
11.1.1 NA NA NA

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-3
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Essbase
Administration Provider Studio
Compatible Product Essbase Services Services Services
Component 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
Essbase versions NA 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x
Administration Services 11.1.1 NA 11.1.1
versions
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x
Provider Services versions 11.1.1 11.1.1 NA
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x
Essbase Studio versions 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 NA
Planning versions 11.1.1 11.1.1 NA
9.3.x
9.2.x
9.3.x
9.2.x
m y
Financial Reporting
versions
11.1.1 NA NA NA

d e
9.3.x
9.2.x
c a
Web Analysis versions 11.1.1 NA

e
NA
A NA
9.3.x
9.2.x
c l
FDM versions 11.1.1
r a NA NA
9.3.x
O ly
& On
9.2.x
l
NA = Not Applicable
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Essbase Client and Server
c l
a
During an Essbase installation, EPM System Installer performs the following operations:
r
O ly
Automatically sets the Essbase installation location, known as ESSBASEPATH, as a
user variable (Windows).

l & On
Creates new directories for a new installation.

n a e
Installs Essbase Server software files to the <HYPERION_HOME>/products/essbase/

e r
EssbaseServer directory.
t U s
I n
If you install a second instance of Essbase on the same computer, installs it in
<HYPERION_HOME>/products/Essbase/EssbaseServer-2.

c l e
Installs common components to the <HYPERION_HOME> directory.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-5
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Installs the appropriate version of Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to the

<HYPERION_HOME>/common/jre directory, and sets the JVMMODULELOCATION
variable in the essbase.cfg file to point to <HYPERION_HOME>/common/jre.
Installs DataDirect ODBC drivers to the <HYPERION_HOME>/common/odbc directory.
Installs Essbase Server sample application files to the ARBORPATH/app directory.
Installs a TCP/IP network protocol file.
(Optional) Updates the Windows environment settings.
Installs the files required to use SQL Interface and Hybrid Analysis.
When Essbase Runtime Client is installed, installs files in, and sets ESSBASEPATH
to <HYPERION_HOME>/common/EssbaseRTC/<version>.

NOTE
If you choose the Advanced installation option to install only certain components,
some operations are not performed.

m y
To install Essbase Client and Ser ver:
d e
a
1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
c
installTool.cmd.

e A
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the

c l
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.

r a
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
O ly
l & On
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
n a e
t e r U s
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Essbase is not installed.

I n
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Essbase is already

l e
installed.
c
r a Select Re-install this release if this version of Essbase is already installed and you
want to re-install it.
O
4-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.
6. Select the following product options and click Next:
Essbase > Essbase Client
Essbase > Essbase Services Server 32-bit or Essbase > Essbase Services Server 64-bit
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Essbase
Services.
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-7
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Administration Services
c l
following operations: r a
During an Administration Services installation, EPM System Installer performs the

O ly
Creates directories and subdirectories under the location that you specify in the
installer.
l & On
a e
On Windows, creates the EASPATH environment variable on the system.
n
e r s
Installs and configures Embedded Java Container during the Essbase Administration
t
Server installation.
U
I n
Adds shortcuts to the Start menu.

c l e
Installs and configures Business Rules software and documentation.

r a
O
4-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

To install Administration Ser vices:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Administration Services is not installed.
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Administration Services
is already installed.
Select Re-install this release if this version of Administration Services is already
installed and you want to re-install it.
m y
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:
d e
c a
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.

e A
c l
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.

r a
6. Make one of the following product selections and click Next:
O ly
Essbase > Essbase Administration Services Client

l & On
Essbase > Essbase Administration Services Web Application

n a e
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click

e r s
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
t U
n
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
I
c l e
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Administration
Services.

r a
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-9
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Provider Services
c l
operations: r a
During a Provider Services installation, EPM System Installer performs the following

O ly
Creates Provider Services installation folders.

l & On
Installs Hyperion common components to the <HYPERION_HOME>/common directory.

n a e
By default, installs Embedded Java Container application server.

t e r U s
On Windows, adds shortcuts to the Start menu.

I n
Installs an uninstaller program.

l e
Creates an environmental variable APS_HOME on Windows, which contains the path of
c
the Provider Services installation.

r a
Installs Provider Services files in <HYPERION_HOME>/products/Essbase/aps.
O
4-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

To install Essbase Provider Ser vices:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Provider Services is not installed.
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Provider Services is
already installed.

and you want to re-install it.

m y
Select Re-install this release if this version of Provider Services is already installed

5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

d e
c a
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.

e A
c l
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.

r a
6. Select Essbase > Provider Services Web Application and click Next:
O ly
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click

l & On
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.

a e
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
n
e r s
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Provider
Services.
t U
I n
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-11
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Installing Essbase Studio

During an Essbase Studio installation, the following are

installed:

Client a nd Common Files Servic es

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Installing Essbase Studio
c l
operations: r a
During an Essbase Studio installation, EPM System Installer performs the following

O ly
Creates directories and subdirectories under the location specified during
installation.
l & On
a e
Installs Essbase Studio files to the
n
t e r U s
<HYPERION_HOME>/products/essbase/EssbaseStudio directory.
Installs common components to the <HYPERION_HOME>/common directory.

I n
Installs the Essbase Studio service, which you can enable during product

l e
configuration.

c
r a
O
4-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

To install Essbase Studio:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Essbase Studio is not installed.
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Essbase Studio is
already installed.

you want to re-install it.

m y
Select Re-install this release if this version of Essbase Studio is already installed and

5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

d e
c a
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.

e A
c l
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.

r a
6. Select Essbase > Essbase Design Studio Server and click Next:
O ly
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click

l & On
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.

a e
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
n
e r s
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Essbase Studio.
t U
n
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.
I
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 4-13
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 4 Installing Essbase Services

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Install Essbase client and Essbase server

Install Administration Services
Install Provider Services
Install Essbase Studio

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
4-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 5

Installing Planning and Performance

Management Architect 5

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Install Planning and Offline Planning
Install Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager
Configure Web Browsers and IIS
Install Smart View

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

m y
d e
c a
e A
Planning Installation Overview
c l
r a
In this lesson, you install Planning, Performance Management Architect, Offline
Planning, Smart View, and Calculation Manager.
O ly
Planning administrators can create two types of applications: Classic Planning

l & On
applications, which use Business Rules, and Performance Management Architect

n a e
Planning applications, which use Calculation Manager business rules. Installing
Performance Management Architect is optional.

t e r U s
With Offline Planning and Smart View, Planners can disconnect from the Planning server

I n
and work with data forms offline. Planners retrieve data forms from Planning, load them
into Smart View, and take them offline. They can also enter and save data directly to the

l e
Planning server.

c
r a
O
5-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

You can work with Planning data forms from remote locations when you are not
connected to a Planning server. You can disconnect from the Planning server and work
offline and still be able to use comparable online functionality. Working offline, you can
enter and save data to the Planning server.
Working offline allows you to take a Planning data form in Excel and establish an
impromptu local connection to a data source without being connected to the Planning
server. Thus, you can continue to work on plan data and perform what-if scenarios when
you do not have access to the Planning server. When you take a data form offline, the
Planning server flags the data form status as offline. Data forms associated with a
connection are saved locally on your hard drive. By synchronizing the locally saved data
with the server, you ensure that the data form uses the most recent information.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-3
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Release Compatibility

If you upgrade Planning to release 11.1.1, you must verify that

all other product components are compatible.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Release Compatibility
c l
components: r a
The following table lists the compatibility between Planning and other Hyperion product

O ly
Compatible Product Component
Shared Services versions
l & On Planning 11.1.1
11.1.1
Workspace versions
n a e 11.1.1

e r s
Performance Management Architect versions
t U 11.1.1
Essbase versions
I n 11.1.1
9.3.x

c l e 9.2.x

r a
O
5-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Compatible Product Component Planning 11.1.1

Administration Services versions 11.1.1
9.3.x
9.2.x
Provider Services versions NA
Essbase Studio versions 11.1.1
Financial Reporting versions 11.1.1
9.3.x
9.2.x
Web Analysis versions 11.1.1
9.3.x
9.2.x
FDM versions Same version deployed with
Essbase

NA = Not Applicable

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-5
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Planning
c l
a
During a Planning installation, EPM System Installer performs the following operations:
r
O ly
Creates directories for a new installation

& On
Copies Planning software files to the specified Planning installation directory
l
a e
Copies common components to the HYPERION_HOME directory

n
t e
Development Kit (JDK) r U s
Installs the appropriate versions of Java Runtime Environment (JRE) and Java

I n
Installs DataDirect JDBC drivers for SQL Server, Oracle, and DB2

l e
Copies files to create a common Remote Method Invocation (RMI) registry, called
c
HyperionRMIRegistry, for products such as Planning and Business Rules.

r a
O
5-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Planning can be installed on a Windows 32-bit, 64-bit, or UNIX machine. However,

Performance Management Architect, must be installed on a 32bit Windows machine.

To install Planning:
1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation.
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Planning is not installed.
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Shared Services is
already installed. m y
d e
Select Re-install this release if this version of Planning is already installed and you
want to re-install it.
c a
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

e A
c l
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
r a
O ly
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services

& On
and components are installed for each product component.

l
a e
6. Make the following product selections and click Next:

n
t e r U s
Planning > Planning Off-line Client
Planning > Planning Web Application

I n
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click

l e
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.

c
r a
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Planning.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-7
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Installing Performance Management Architect
c
a
Performance Management Architect is a component of Foundation Services.
r
O ly
Performance Management Architect helps streamline the creation and deployment of
financial applications from a central location. The visual environment provided by

l & On
Performance Management Architect allows for a simple and intuitive user experience in

logic.
n a e
modeling the financial business process, including data, dimensions, and application

t e r U s
Performance Management Architect helps users configure these dimensions from an

I n
extensible library, link different applications, re-use or move artifacts from one application
to another, and graphically manage data flows between applications. In this way,

l e
Performance Management Architect provides the industrys first business process

c
modeling tool for building and maintaining Planning and Financial Management

r a
applications.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-9
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

During a Performance Management Architect installation, EPM System Installer

performs the following operations:
Creates directories and subdirectories under the location specified during
installation.
Copies software files to the Performance Management Architect installation directory.
Creates the virtual directory in IIS
Installs the Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0, if not already installed
Installs C++ Runtime libraries.
Installs services required to start the product.
Sets up a virtual directory in IIs for the Dimension Server

The following table lists and describes Performance Management Architect components:

Performance Management Architect

Components Description
m y
Batch Client
e
Installs a command line tool to access Performance
Management Architect.
d
Generator Installs the Excel file generator tool.
c a
Web Application
A
Installs all components to access Performance
Management Architect through the Internet.

e
Data Synchronizer Service
c l
Installs the Performance Management Architect data
synchronization engine.
Dimension Server Service
r a Installs the Performance Management Architect

O ly dimension server.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

The following table lists the Performance Management Architect components and
services installed on each tier, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

Performance Management Performance Management Performance Management
Architect Batch client Architect Web application Architect Data Synchronizer
Service
Performance Management
Architect Generator Performance Management
Architect Dimension Server
Service
Assemblies: Assemblies: Assemblies:
bpm_architect_batch_client bpm_architect_webapp bpm_architect_datasync
bpm_architect_generator bpm_architect_services

To install Performance Management Architect:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites carefully. After confirming that your system meets the
prerequisites to run EPM System Installer, click Next to continue the installation. m y
d e
3. Specify the destination for the installation location, or browse to a location and select
it, and then click Next.
c a
The selected destination becomes Hyperion Home. Make sure

e A
this destination has enough space to install all necessary products
on this machine.
c l
r a
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.

O ly
Select New installation if Performance Management Architect is not installed.

l & On
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Performance
Management Architect is already installed.

n a e
t e r
Select Re-install this release if this version of Performance Management Architect is
s
already installed and you want to re-install it.
U
I n
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

l e
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,

c
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location

r a and the products to install.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-11
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.
6. Select Foundation > Performance Management Architect and click Next:
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Performance
Management Architect.
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

Internet Information Server

To use Performance Management Architect, you must have IIS installed on the machine
that has Dimension Server installed.
For Windows 2000 Server, IIS 5.0 is provided.
For Windows 2003, IIS 6.0 is provided. For IIS 6.0, you must enable these
components:
m y
- Active Server Pages (ASP)
d e
- ASP .NET 2.0 (automatically installed if not present)
c a
Microsoft .NET 2.0 Framework
e A
c l
Performance Management Architect requires Microsoft .NET 2.0 Framework on the

r a
machine where you install the Dimension server. If you do not have .NET 2.0 Framework
installed on your machine, EPM System Installer automatically installs it for you.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Calculation Manager
c l
r a
Calculation Manager is a feature of Performance Management Architect. It provides the
graphical interface for building and calculating business rules for Planning and Financial
Management applications.
O ly
l & On
Calculation Manager is installed with Foundation Services. To use Calculation Manager,

a e
you must install both Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager.

n
t e r U s
Calculation Manager components are installed in
<HYPERION_HOME>/products/Foundation/CALC.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-13
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

The following table describes the Calculation Manager components and services
installed on each tier, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

None Calculation Manager None
Web application
Assemblies: Assemblies: Assemblies:
calc

To install Calculation Manager:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites, and click Next to continue the installation.
3. Accept the default for Hyperion Home, and click Next.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Calculation Manager is not installed.
m y
already installed.
d e
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Calculation Manager is

c a
Select Re-install this release if this version of Calculation Manager is already installed
and you want to re-install it.

e A
l
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:
c
r a
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
O ly
l & On
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.

n a e
t e r
6. Select Foundation > Calculation Manager and click Next.

U s
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click

I n
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.

l e
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:

c
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Calculation

r a Manager.

O
5-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-15
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring Web Browsers
c l
options are enabled as follows: r a
For Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox, make sure that the browser preferences and

Enable JavaScript. O ly
l & On
Enable cookies. The preferred setting is to allow cookies to be stored on your
computer.
n a e
e r s
Set the minimum requirement for cookies at a per session level.
t U
n
Allow pop-up windows for the Reporting and Analysis Web server.
I
c l e
r a
O
5-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Installing Smart View

During a Smart View for Office installation, the following are

installed:

Common Files and

Interface Modules .Net Framew ork

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Installing Smart View
c l
r a
Smart View is a component of Foundation Services. It is a comprehensive tool for
accessing and integrating Hyperion content from with Microsoft Office products.
Smart View key capabilities: O ly
l & On
Ability to integrate Hyperion data directly from the data source into Microsoft Word,
a e
Microsoft PowerPoint, and Microsoft Outlook
n
e r s
Full ad-hoc and free form analysis capabilities for Financial Management, Essbase,
and Planning
t U
I n
An alternative, Office-based interface for leveraging Planning, Financial

l e
Management, and Workforce Planning data entry forms

c
a
Ability to execute Hyperion reporting jobs from within Office applications
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-17
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Ability to dynamically refresh Hyperion data across Office documents with a single
click
Ability to perform selective, multi-page import of documents residing in a Hyperion
repository into Office documents, including reports created in Financial Reporting,
Interactive Reporting, SQR Production Reporting, and Web Analysis.
Point of View (POV) search for efficient, context-based searching
Support for highly formatted grids in Microsoft Excel
Comprehensive VBA toolkit for developing custom Office-based analytic interfaces
Smart View requires the use of Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0. When you select this
component, if you do not have .NET Framework 2.0 installed, EPM System Installer
installs it as part of the installation process.
Smart View files are installed in <HYPERION_HOME>/products/Foundation/SmartView.
The following table describe the components and services installed on each tier (Client,
Web, and Services) for Calculation Manager, as well as the corresponding assembly
files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

m y
Smart View for Office client None None
d e
Assemblies: Assemblies: Assemblies:
c a
svc_client NA

e
NA
A
To install Smart View:
c l
r a
1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
O ly
& On
2. Review the list of prerequisites, and click Next to continue the installation.

l
a e
3. Accept the default for Hyperion Home, and click Next.

n
t e r U s
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Smart View is not installed.

I n
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Smart View is already

l e
installed.

c
r a
Select Re-install this release if this version of Smart View is already installed and you
want to re-install it.

O
5-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:

Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.
6. Select Foundation > Smart View Client and click Next.
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Smart View.
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 5-19
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 5 Installing Planning and Performance Management Architect

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Install Planning and Offline Planning

Install Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager
Configure Web Browsers and IIS
Install Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
5-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 6

Installing Reporting and Analysis 6

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Install AFPL Ghostscript
Install Reporting and Analysis component

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Reporting and Analysis Installation Overview
c
a
In this class, you install Financial Reporting and Web Analysis.
r
Financial Reporting O ly
l & On
Financial Reporting is a module of Oracle BIEE Plus that enables book-quality financial

n a e
management and reporting targeted at meeting the unique requirements of the Finance
department or any functional area that requires very highly formatted multidimensional

e r s
reporting. This financial reporting solution can use Financial Management, Planning,
t U
Essbase, as well as SAP BW as data sources.

I n
c l e
r a
O
6-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Financial Reporting provides conditional suppression and automatic calculations that

can be used to focus and filter reports. A graphical, object-based interface enables the
rapid creation of reports that combine grids of data and text, charts, graphs, and images.
A library of reusable report components simplifies and streamlines the process of
building and maintaining complex reports. Users have complete control over layouts,
formatting, fonts, and colors, as well as a flexible range of output options enabling wide
distribution via print, HTML Web pages, PDF, and online viewing. A scalable, cross-
platform report server facilitates easy deployment to large user communities.
Financial Reporting shares common administration, user management, installation, and
configuration support with other Hyperion BI tools. This common infrastructure provides
one point of access for end users to all content while reducing the maintenance required
for IT professionals.

Web Analysis
Web Analysis is a module of Oracle BIEE Plus that delivers powerful, intuitive, Web-
based interactive analytics to all corners of the enterprise. A highly graphical and easy-
to-use interactive interface, it enables users to view their data in a way that makes sense
to them.
Web Analysis facilitates access to packaged application and multidimensional data
m y
sources, such as Enterprise Performance Management applications, Essbase, SAP
d e
c a
Business Information Warehouse, and Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services. It
supports drill-through to a wide variety of relational data sources, including drill-through
to URL.

e A
c l
Web Analysis provides a broad range of flexible, easy to use display types including
grids, charts, pin boards, traffic lighting, and personalization. Users have complete

r a
control over layouts, formatting, fonts, and colors, as well as a flexible array of output
options enabling wide distribution via print, HTML Web pages, PDF, and online viewing.
O ly
l & On
Web Analysis shares common administration, user management, and installation and
configuration support with other Hyperion BI modules of Oracle BIEE Plus. This common

a e
infrastructure provides one point of access for end users to all content while reducing the
n
t e r
maintenance required for IT professionals.

U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-3
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
Reporting and Analysis Architecture
c l
Database. r a
The Reporting and Analysis environment is organized into three layers: Client, Application,

O ly
Client Layer
l & On
n a e
The client layer refers to local interfaces used to author, model, analyze, present, report,
and distribute diverse content, and third-party clients, such as Microsoft Office:

t e r U s
WorkspaceWeb-based DHTML zero-footprint client that provides the user

I n
interface for viewing and interacting with content created by the authoring studios,
and enables users to create queries against relational and multidimensional data

l
sources.
c e
r a
Windows authoring studiosEach reporting tool has a Windows authoring client
(studio) for creating and editing reports.
O
6-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Smart ViewHyperion-specific Microsoft add-in and toolbar from which users can
query Hyperion data sources including Essbase, Financial Management, and
Planning. In this environment, users can interact with Financial Management and
Planning forms for data input, and can browse the Reporting and Analysis repository
and embed documents in the office environment. Documents are updated by user
request.

Application Layer
The application layer is a middle tier that retrieves requested information and manages
security, communication, and integration. It includes an application layer web tier and an
application layer services tier.

Application Layer Web Tier

The application layer relies upon a J2EE application server and Web server to send and
receive content from Web clients. An HTTP connector is required to link the Web server
and the application server.
The Web tier hosts the Workspace, Interactive Reporting, Financial Reporting, and Web
Analysis Web applications.

m y
For a complete description of supported Web tier hardware and software, see the
Hyperion Installation Start Here.
d e
Application Layer Services Tier c a
A
The application layer services tier contains services and servers that control functionality
e
of various Web applications and clients:
c l
document publication.
r a
Core services are mandatory for authorization, session management, and

O ly
Interactive Reporting services are Core Services that support Interactive

l & On
Reporting functionality by communicating with data sources, starting RSC services,
and distributing Interactive Reporting client content.

n a e
t e r
Financial Reporting servers support Financial Reporting functionality by
s
processing batch requests, generating output, and distributing Financial Reporting
U
client content.
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-5
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Database Layer
The database layer consists of the repository databases for system data, application
data, multi-dimensional data, and other data sources used to create the dynamic and
static reports in the suite of Reporting and Analysis tools.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Release Compatibility

If you upgrade Reporting and Analysis products to release

11.1.1, you must verify that all other product components are
compatible.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Release Compatiblity
c l
r a
The following table lists the compatibility between Reporting and Analysis components
and other Hyperion product components:
O ly
l & On
Interactive Financial
SQR
Production Web
Compatible Product
Component
n a e
Reporting
11.1.1
Reporting
11.1.1
Reporting
11.1.1
Analysis
11.1.1

t e
Shared Services versionsr U s
11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
Workspace versions
I n 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1

l e
Performance Management
Architect versions

c
NA NA NA NA

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-7
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

SQR
Interactive Financial Production Web
Compatible Product Reporting Reporting Reporting Analysis
Component 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
Essbase versions 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1 11.1.1
9.3.x 9.3.x 9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x 9.2.x 9.2.x
Administration Services NA NA NA NA
versions
Provider Services versions NA 11.1.1 NA 11.1.1
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x
Planning versions NA 11.1.1 NA 11.1.1
9.3.x 9.3.x
9.2.x 9.2.x

NA = Not Applicable

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Installing AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.1

AFPL Ghostscript is:

An interpreter for the PostScriptTM language and the
Adobe Portable Document Format
A set of input and output modules used for a wide variety
of window systems, raster file formats, and printers
A PDF output module that implements functions similar to
Adobe's AcrobatT Distiller product

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installing AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.1
c l
and: r a
AFPL Ghostscript is a third-party application software that reads PostScript or PDF files

O ly
Displays the results on the screen

l & On
Converts results into a form you can print on a non-PostScript printer

n a e
For Financial Reporting, you must use Ghostscript, not Distiller, to import content into

e r
Microsoft Word and PowerPoint.
t U s
I n
Ghostscript is copyrighted by artofcode LLC. It is not shareware or in the public domain.
Ghostscript is distributed with a license called the Aladdin Free Public License that

l e
allows free use, copying, and distribution by end users, but does not allow commercial

c
distribution. To obtain a copy of AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.1, go to

r a
http://pages.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-9
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Financial Reporting
c l
a
Financial Reporting files are installed in <HYPERION_HOME>/products/biplus.
r
O ly
The following table describes the Financial Reporting components:

Financial Reporting Components

l & On
Description
Studio Client

n a e Installs a Windows authoring client for creating and

editing reports.
Web Application
t e r U s Installs all components to access Financial Reporting
through the Internet.

I n
Reports Server Service Installs the Financial Reporting Reports Server,

c l e which generates and formats dynamic report or book

results, including specified calculations.

r a
O
6-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Financial Reporting Components Description

Print Server Service Installs the Financial Reporting Print Server, which
enables Financial Reporting content to be compiled
as PDF output.
Scheduler Server Service Installs the Financial Reporting Scheduler Server,
which responds to Financial Reporting scheduled
batch requests and prompts the other Financial
Reporting servers to fulfill the request at the specified
time.

The following table lists the Financial Reporting components and services installed on
each tier, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

Client Tier Web Tier Services Tier

Oracle's Hyperion Financial Financial Reporting Web Financial Reporting Reports
Reporting Studio Client Application Server Service
Financial Reporting Print
Server Service
Oracle's Hyperion
m y
d e
Financial Reporting
System 9 Scheduler Server

Assemblies: Assemblies:
Service

c
Assemblies:
a
biplus_financial_reporting_cl biplus_financial_reporting_w
e A
biplus_financial_reporting_se
ient
biplus_financial_reporting_c
ebapp

c l
biplus_configlibs
rvices
biplus_configlibs
ommon
r a
biplus_financial_reporting_c biplus_financial_reporting_co

O ly
ommon mmon

To install Financial Reporting:

l & On
n a e
1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.

t e r U s
I n
2. Review the list of prerequisites, and click Next to continue the installation.
3. Accept the default for Hyperion Home, and click Next.

c l e
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.

r a Select New installation if Financial Reporting is not installed.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-11
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Financial Reporting is

already installed.
Select Re-install this release if this version of Financial Reporting is already installed
and you want to re-install it.
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services
and components are installed for each product component.
6. Select the Financial Reporting components you want to install and click Next.
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Financial
Reporting.
m y
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installing Web Analysis
c l
a
Web Analysis files are installed in <HYPERION_HOME>/products/biplus.
r
O ly
The following table describes the Web Analysis components and services installed on
each tier, as well as the corresponding assembly files:

l & On
Client Tier

n a e
Web Tier Services Tier
None

t e r Web Analysis Web

s
Application

U
None

Assemblies:
None I n Assemblies:
biplus_webanalysis_w
Assemblies:
None

c l e ebapp
biplus_configlibs

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-13
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

To install Web Analysis:

1. Browse to where you extracted the EPM System Installer files, and double-click
installTool.cmd.
2. Review the list of prerequisites, and click Next to continue the installation.
3. Accept the default for Hyperion Home, and click Next.
4. Select one of the following installation types, and click Next.
Select New installation if Web Analysis is not installed.
Select Upgrade from previous release if a previous version of Web Analysis is already
installed.
Select Re-install this release if this version of Web Analysis is already installed and
you want to re-install it.
5. Choose one of the following options and click Next:
Select Choose Components By Tier if you want to install all the components, by tier,
for the selected products. You still have the option to specify installation location
and the products to install.
m y
and components are installed for each product component.
d e
Select Choose Components Individually if you want more control over which services

6. Select Web Analysis and click Next.

c a
A
7. Review the summary of products to be installed. If you need to make changes, click
e
l
Back and make changes as appropriate. Click Next to begin the installation process.
c
a
8. Review the installation summary, and select an option:
r
O ly
Click Configure to launch EPM System Configurator and configure Web Analysis.

& On
Click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

l
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Install AFPL Ghostscript

Install Reporting and Analysis components

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 6-15
 Module 2 Product Installation
Lesson 6 Installing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
6-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 M O D U L E 3

Product Configuration 6

Overview
In this module, you configure Planning and its required components.
Lessons in this module include:
Configuring Shared Services
Configuring Essbase Services
Configuring Planning
Configuring Reporting and Analysis
Configuring Workspace
m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 7

Configuring Shared Services 7

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Describe the EPM System Configurator
Configure Shared Services
Configure External User Directories
Provision Users and Groups
Create and Manage Application Groups
Troubleshoot Shared Services Installations
m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

EPM System Configurator Overview

You use EPM System Configurator to configure and deploy

Oracle Hyperion products.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
EPM System Configurator Overview
c l
r a
EPM System Configurator is installed with the first EPM System product installed on a
computer and is used to configure all products installed on the computer. You use EPM
O ly
System Configurator on each computer to which EPM System products are installed.

l & On
EPM System Configurator provides these tasks for configuration and reconfiguration of
EPM System products:

n a e
t e r U s
Configure Database for Shared Servicesthe database that you configure for
Shared Services, which holds the Oracle's Shared Services Registry.

I n
Common SettingsEPM System Configurator displays the Common Settings panel

c l e
once on each machine you configure.
Configure Product OptionsTo comply with your license agreement, select the

r a
product features that you are authorized to use.

O
7-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Configure Database for productsTo store and retrieve application data in a

database.
Deploy to Application ServerTo deploy the application automatically to a Java
application server.
Shared Services registrationTo use Shared Services to provision and share users
among Hyperion product applications. You do not need to select this task; all
products that require it are automatically registered with Shared Services during
configuration.
Product-specific configuration tasks for products that require it.
Not all tasks are required for all products.
EPM System Configurator creates a pre-provisioned user called admin. After
configuration, log on to Shared Services using the admin/password user to create and
provision users. Oracle recommends that you change this password immediately in
Shared Services.

Configuration Sequence

m y
For a new installation, Oracle recommends that you configure all EPM System products

products.
d e
at one time for each machine. By default, EPM System Configurator pre-selects all

c a
NOTE

e A
c l
By default, EPM System Configurator uses the same database for all products
you configure at one time. If you want to use a different database for each

r a
product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

O ly
& On
If you have already configured Workspace, and you deploy additional Hyperion products
l
n a e
that use Workspace, you must run EPM System Configurator again and select the
Workspace Configure Web Server task.

t e r U s
Product Configuration in a Single-Machine Environment
I n
Oracle recommends that for each machine, you configure all EPM System products at

l e
one time for the products installed on the machine. If you are configuring multiple

c
products on a machine simultaneously, EPM System Configurator configures them in the

r a
correct order.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-3
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Product Configuration in a Distributed Environment

Configure the products on the machine on which you installed Shared Services first, and
make sure Shared Services is up and running. Then, for each machine in the
deployment, configure all EPM System products at one time for the products installed on
the machine.

Configuring EPM Products

You run EPM System Configurator on each computer hosting the products to configure
or reconfigure.

To configure EPM System products:

1. From the Start menu, select Programs > Oracle EPM System > Foundation Services > EPM
System Configurator.
2. Review and complete each panel of EPM System Configurator, and click Next to
move to the next panel.
3. Confirm the configuration tasks to complete, and click Next.
EPM System Configurator displays the status of the configuration
m y
process. Configuration time depends on the products and tasks
you selected.
d e
Progress is recorded in
c a
HYPERION_HOME/logs/config/configtool.log

e A
c l
When configuration finishes, the status of each task is displayed.
4. (Optional) Click Task Panel if you want to return to the Task Selection panel to complete
additional configuration tasks.
r a
O ly
5. (Optional) Click Validate to validate the installation.

l & On
EPM System Diagnostics tests the status of installed and

n a e
configured EPM System components, diagnoses problems, and
assists in problem resolution. The results of the tests are saved in
HTML format.

t e r U s
6. Click Finish.
I n
c l e
EPM System Configurator displays error messages on a summary page after the

a
configuration process completes.
r
O
7-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuration Tasks for Shared Services
c l
a
You perform the following tasks to configure Shared Services:
r
Configure Common Settings
O ly
Configure Databases
l & On
a e
Deploy to Application Servers

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-5
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Configuring Common Settings

Common settings include creating Windows services and

specifying an SMTP server.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Common Settings
c l
the Shared Services Registry.
r a
You specify common settings for all products on all machines that have been identified in

O ly
You enter values for the following EPM System Configurator Common Settings:

l & On
Field

n a e
Create Windows Services for configured
Description
Configures each service as a Windows service
components

t e r
Enable SSL for communications
U s that starts automatically when you start Windows.
Enables SSL communication for all Web

I n applications. If this option is selected, URLs are in

the form https.

c l e
r a
O
7-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
SMTP Mail Server For products that integrate an E-mail feature that
uses standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) protocol, specify the outgoing mail
(SMTP) server. To enable E-mail alerts, you must
specify the SMTP server name.
SMTP Server require authentication Specify whether the SMTP server requires
authentication, and then specify a user name and
password.
UserID Specify the user name for the SMTP server.
Password Specify the password for the SMTP server.
Admin Email Specify the E-mail address for E-mail
notifications.

NOTE
Selecting the Enable SSL option does not enable secure communication for the
Web server. See Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
SSL Configuration Guide for more information.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-7
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Configuring Databases

The Shared Services database includes the Shared Services

Registry.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Databases
c l
r a
You specify the database settings to use for the products you selected on the Task
Selection panel. For deployment purposes, you can:

O ly
Use one database for all products, which is the default when you configure all
products at the same time.
l & On
a e
Use a different database for each product and perform the Configure Database task
n
t e r
separately for each product.

U s
When you configure EPM System products to use a database, EPM System

I n
Configurator ensures that the database is connected and supported.

c l e
r a
O
7-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

You specify values for the following database options in EPM System Configurator:

Field Description
Database configuration for the following Confirm the list of products for which you want to
products configure the database. The list is determined by
the products that you initially selected to
configure.
To create different databases for each product,
select only one product at a time and run EPM
System Configurator again to configure the
database for another product.
Use an existing database Select a previously configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to configure.
Create new database
This task assumes you have already created the
database. It will not create the database.
Database Type Select a database type from the list of supported
database types.
Server Specify the name of the computer or server
hosting the database.
Port y
Select the default or specify a custom server port
number on which the database listens.
m
Service Name or SID Specify the name of the database.
d e
c a
If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify
the RAC service name.
Username A
Enter the database user name.
e
Password
c l Enter the database user password.
Advanced Options
r a Optional. Click to specify additional information.

Shared Services Registry O ly

l & On
The Shared Services Registry is stored in the database during Shared Services
a e
configuration. It is created the first time you configure EPM System products, and it
n
t e r s
simplifies configuration by storing and reusing the following information for most
Hyperion products that you install.
U
I n
Initial configuration values such as installation directories, database settings, and
deployment settings

c l e
Host computer names, ports, servers, and URLs that you use to implement multiple,

r a
integrated, Hyperion products and components

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-9
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Dependent service data

Configuration changes you make for one product are automatically applied to other
products used in the deployment.
You can view and manage the contents of the Shared Services Registry using Lifecycle
Management in the Shared Services Console. For more information, see Oracle
Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle Management Guide.
When you upgrade from a previous release of EPM System products, EPM System
Configurator updates the Shared Services Registry for products that you upgrade.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Deploying to Application Servers

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Deploying to Application Servers
c l
a
You select the application server and deployment type.
r
O ly
You can deploy multiple products to one application server, in a single profile
(WebSphere) or domain (WebLogic). The application server must be installed on the

l & On
same computer as the products being deployed. For simplicity, Oracle recommends that
you use the same application server, and domain or profile.

n a e
NOTE

t e r U s
Shared Services does not support load balancing.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-11
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

You specify the following application server information:

Field Description
Select Server: Select the application server you installed, and
specify whether you want to deploy automatically or
Automatic
manually.
Manual
If you select Embedded Java Container, you can
deploy automatically only.
If you are deploying your product to a single
application server, decide between these
deployment options:
Automatic Deploys all files to the application
server. In most cases, no other deployment tasks
are required.
Manual EPM System Configurator places the
necessary Web archives (EAR or WAR) in a
directory to enable manual deployment at a future
time.
If you select Manual, see the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System
Manual Deployment Guide for details.
m y
The following conditions apply to automatic deployment:
d e
c a
Automatic deployment might not be suitable for configurations that require encrypted

span multiple machines.

e A
(SSL) communication, or for centrally managed application server installations that

c l
Only 32bit application servers are supported for auto-deployment. To deploy

r a
Administration Services or Provider Services to 64-bit application servers, install the
64-bit binaries for those products using the Choose components individually option
O ly
in EPM System Installer and then follow the manual deployment instructions in

Guide.
l & On
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Manual Deployment

n a e
Once you have selected an application server and a deployment type, you enter

e r s
application-server-specific information.
t U
I n
Oracle Application Server

l e
Specify the application server options, or click Next to accept the default entries.

c
EPM System Configurator creates a group for each deployed web application that has

r a
the same name as the server.

O
7-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
Location Enter the path to the application server installation
directory; for example:
Windows C:/Oracle/product/OracleAS
Ear/War Select the components to deploy
Set Up If you have set up a cluster, or plan to set up a
cluster, click Set up.
Otherwise, EPM System Configurator adds this
deployment to a default cluster with the name
Default.

Weblogic
Specify the application server options, or click Next to accept the default entries.
When using WebLogic, a default username and password of hyperion is used to
administer the domain. You can manually change the credentials after deploying.
If you are deploying Shared Services (automatically or manually) to WebLogic 9.2, the
m y
authentication headers. Please see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
d e
config.xml file must be modified to prevent Weblogic from trying to authenticate basic

Management Installation and Configuration Guide for details.

c a
Field Description

e A
Location

c l
Enter the path to the application server installation
directory; for example:

r a Windows c:/bea/weblogic92
Domain
O ly Displays the default name of the domain where you
access the application. All applications deploy to the

l & On same domain.

Ear/War

n a e Select the components to deploy

Server Name
Port
t e r U s Displays the Server Name
Accept the default port, or enter a port number that

I n does not conflict with other applications installed on

your machine.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-13
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
SSL Port Accept the default port or specify the SSL Port to
use for automatic deployment. Specifying this port
sets up SSL using the Java application server's
default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System SSL
Configuration Guide for recommendations on
updating the Java application server with a valid
certificate.
If you are using SSL, you must clear the non-SSL
port in your Java application server after
configuration to ensure secure communication. See
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management System Manual Deployment Guide.
Set Up If you have set up a cluster, or plan to set up a
cluster, click Set up. Otherwise, EPM System
Configurator adds this deployment to a default
cluster with the name Default..

Websphere
Specify the application server options, or click Next to accept the default entries.

m y
Field Description
d e
Location
a
Enter the path to the application server installation
directory; for example:
c
Websphere base:

e A
Windows c:/WebSphere/AppServer

c l
Websphere Express:

r a Windows c:/IBM/WebSphere/Express61/
AppServer
Profile O ly Displays the default name of the profile where you

l & On access the application. By default, all applications

deploy to the same profile.
Ear/War
n a e Select the components to deploy
Server Name
t e r U s Displays the Server Name
Port
I n Accept the default port, or enter a port number that
does not conflict with other applications installed on

c l e your machine.

r a
O
7-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
SSL Port Accept the default port or specify the SSL Port to
use for automatic deployment. Specifying this port
sets up SSL using the Java application server's
default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System SSL
Configuration Guide for recommendations on
updating the Java application server with a valid
certificate.
If you are using SSL, you must clear the non-SSL
port in your Java application server after
configuration to ensure secure communication. See
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management System Manual Deployment Guide.
Set Up If you have set up a cluster, or plan to set up a
cluster, click Set up.
Otherwise, EPM System Configurator adds this
deployment to a default cluster with the name
Default.

Embedded Java Container (Tomcat)

Specify the application server options, or click Next to accept the default entries.
m y
d e
Field
Ear/War
Description
Select the components to deploy
c a
Server Name Displays the Server Name

e A
Port
c l
Accept the default port, or enter a port number that
does not conflict with other applications installed on

r a your machine.

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-15
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
SSL Port Accept the default port or specify the SSL Port to
use for automatic deployment. Specifying this port
sets up SSL using the Java application server's
default certificates.
If you are using SSL, you must clear the non-SSL
port in your Java application server after
configuration to ensure secure communication.
See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance
Management System SSL Configuration Guide for
more information on SSL Configuration.
Set Up If you have set up a cluster, or plan to set up a
cluster, click Set up.
Otherwise, EPM System Configurator adds this
deployment to a default cluster with the name
Default.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring User Directories
c l
r a
When you install and deploy Shared Services, Native Directory, the default user directory
for Oracles Hyperion products, is configured automatically. You can configure external
O ly
user directories to support single sign-on and authorization for the Oracle Hyperion

l & On
products that you install. Shared Services Console writes the configuration information to
the CSS.xml file packaged with Shared Services.

n a e
You can perform these user directory management and configuration tasks in the Shared
Services Console:
t e r U s
n
Configure user directories
I
c l e
Test user directory connections
Edit user directory settings

r a
Delete user directories

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-17
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Manage user directory search order

After configuring the directories, you must synchronize them with the Shared Services
database.

Native Directory
By default, Native Directory contains one user account, admin, with a default password
of password. With this user account, you can manage Native Directory user accounts:
Create users
Modify user accounts
Deactivate user accounts
Delete user accounts
Provision users and groups
Deprovision users and groups
Generate provisioning reports

m y
External Directories
d e
You cannot manage MSAD and LDAP users and groups in Shared Services Console.

c a
You can configure Shared Services to work with the users and groups that you created in
MSAD or LDAP-enabled user directories.

e A
c l
To configure Oracle Internet Director y, MSAD, or other LDAP-enabled
user directories:
r a
O ly
1. Selecting Start > Programs > Hyperion > Foundation Services > Shared Services Console.

& On
2. Select Configuration > Configure User Directories.

l
a e
The Defined User Directories page is displayed.

n
3. Click Add.

t e r U s
4. In Directory Type, select an option:

I n
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) to configure an LDAP-enabled user

l e
directory other than MSAD.

c
Microsoft Active Directory (MSAD) to configure MSAD.

r a
O
7-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

5. Click Next.
The Connection Information page for the selected user directory
type is displayed.
6. Enter the required parameters:

Field Description
Directory Server Select a user directory. Select Other if you are using an LDAP
Version 2 (or later) product other than those listed.
The ID Attribute value changes to the recommended
constant identity attribute for the selected product.
Name Enter a descriptive name to identify a specific user directory
if multiple user directories are configured.
DNS Lookup Select this option to enable DNS lookup. (MSAD only)
Hostname Select this option to enable static host name lookup. (MSAD
only)
Host Name Enter the name of the user directory server. Use the fully
qualified domain name if the user directory is to be used to
support SSO from SiteMinder.
If you are using DNS lookup for MSAD, specify the DNS
m y
server name.
d e
Port
SSL Enabled c a
Enter the port number where the user directory is running.
Select to enable Secure Socket Layer (SSL) communication

e
configured for secure communication. A
with this user directory. The user directory must be

Base DN
c l
The distinguished name (DN) of the node where the search

r a
for users and groups should begin. You can also use the
Fetch DNs button to list available base DNs and then select

O ly
the appropriate base DN from the list.
ID Attribute
& On
A unique user attribute. The recommended value of this

l
attribute is automatically set for Oracle Internet Directory

n a e
orclguid, SunONE (nsuniqueid), IBM Directory Server
(Ibm-entryUuid), Novell eDirectory (GUID), and MSAD

t e r U s
(ObjectGUID).
You may change the default value if necessary.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-19
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
Maximum Size Maximum number of results that a search can return. If this
value is higher than that supported by the user directory
settings, the user directory value overrides this value.
For LDAP-enabled user directories other than MSAD, leave
this blank to retrieve all users and groups that meet the
search criteria.
For MSAD, set this value to 0 to retrieve all users and groups
that meet the search criteria
Anonymous Bind Select this check box to indicate that Shared Services can
bind anonymously to the user directory to search for users
and groups. This can be used only if the user directory
allows anonymous binds. Otherwise, you must specify in the
User DN an account with sufficient access permissions to
search the directory where user information is stored. Oracle
Internet Directory connections do not support anonymous
binds.
Note: Oracle does not recommend using anonymous binds.
Trusted Select this check box to indicate that this provider is a
trusted SSO source. SSO tokens from trusted sources do
not contain the user's password.
m y
User DN
e
Enter the distinguished name of the user that Shared

d
Services should use to bind with the user directory. This

Base DN.
c a
distinguished name must have read privileges within the

selected.
e A
This box is disabled if the Anonymous Bind option is

Append Base DN
c l
Select this check box to append the base DN to the User

r a
DN. If you are using Directory Manager account as the User
DN, do not append the Base DN.

O ly
This check box is disabled if the Anonymous bind option is
selected.
Password
l & On
Enter the User DN password.

n a e
This box is disabled if the Anonymous bind option is

t e r
CSS Cache Refresh Interval
U s
selected.
Enter the interval (in minutes) for refreshing the Shared

I n Services cache, which contains user and group information

from the user directory. Provisioning information for newly

c l e added users and groups in user directories is available to

Shared Services only after the next cache refresh. As a
result, new users and members of new groups not getting

r a their provisioned roles for the duration of the refresh interval.

O
7-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
Referrals Select follow to automatically use LDAP referrals. Select
ignore to disregard referrals.
Dereference Aliases Select the method that Shared Services searches should
use to dereference aliases in the user directory so that
searches retrieve the object to which the DN of the alias
points. Select:
Always: To always dereference aliases.
Never: To never dereference aliases.
Finding: To dereference aliases only during name
resolution.
Searching: To dereference aliases only after name
resolution.
Support Connection Pooling Select this check box to enable connection pooling for the
user directory.
Max Connections Enter the maximum number of connections in the pool. The
default is 100 for LDAP-enabled directories, including
MSAD, and 300 for Native Directory.
Time Out Enter a connections timeout from the pool. An exception is
thrown after this period. The default value is 300000
m y
milliseconds (5 minutes).
d e
Evict Interval

c a
Optional: Enter the interval for running the eviction process
to clean up the pool. The eviction process cleans up idle

A
connections that have exceeded the Allowed Idle
Connection Time. The default value is 60 minutes.

e
Allowed Idle Connection Time
c l
Optional: Enter the time after which the eviction process
cleans up the idle connections in the pool. The default value

r a
is 120 minutes.
Grow Connections
O ly
Select this option to indicate whether the connection pool
can grow beyond Max Connections. The default value is

l & On
TRUE. If you do not allow the connection pool to grow, the
system throws an error if a connection is not available within

n a e
the time set for Time Out.

t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-21
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

7. Click Next.
The User Configuration page is displayed. Shared Services uses
the properties set on this page to create a user URL that is used
to determine the node where search for users begins. The URL
accelerates the search process.
Oracle recommends that you use the Auto Configure area of the
page to retrieve the required information.
NOTE
Data entry in the User Configuration page is optional. If you do not specify these
settings, Shared Services searches within the Base DN to locate users. This
process may have performance implications, especially if the user directory
contains accounts for many users.

8. In the text box in the Auto Configure area, enter a unique user identifier, and click
Auto Configure.
User attributes are displayed in the User Configuration area. You
can manually enter required user attributes into text boxes in the
User Configuration area.
m y
d e
Field
User RDN
Description

c a
The Relative DN (RDN) of the user. Each component of an

A
RDN represents a branch in the directory tree. A users RDN
is generally the equivalent of the uid or cn.
e
Login
c l
The attribute that stores the login name of the user. Users

r a
use the value of this attribute as the User Name while
logging into Oracle's Hyperion products.
First Name
O ly
The attribute that stores the first name of the user.
Last Name

l & On
The attribute that stores the last name of the user.
Email

n a eThe attribute that stores a users e-mail address (optional).

Object Class

t e r U
Object classes of the user (the mandatory and optional
s
attributes that can be associated with the user). Shared
Services uses the object class to find users who should be

I n provisioned.
You can manually add or delete object classes, if needed:

c l e In the Object class box, enter the object class and click

r a Add.
Select the object class and clic Remove.

O
7-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
Advanced Filter Check box that, when selected, enables the use of a filter to
retrieve users during search operations.
Limit Users To LDAP query that retrieves only the users that are to be
provisioned with Oracle's Hyperion product roles. For
example, the LDAP query (uid=Hyp*) retrieves only users
whose names start with the prefix Hyp.
User filters limit the number of users returned during a query.
They are especially important if the node identified by the
user URL contains many users that need not be provisioned.
By excluding users that are not to be provisioned, you
improve performance.
After entering the user filter, click Preview to validate the
query.

9. Click Next.
The Group Configuration page for the selected user directory type
is displayed. Shared Services uses the properties set on this page
to create group URLs. Group URLs are used to improve search
performance.
m y
NOTE

d e
Data entry in the Group Configuration page is optional. If you do not enter the

c
group URL settings, Shared Services searches within the Base DN to locate a
directory contains several groups.
e A
groups. This process can negatively affect performance, especially if the user

c l
r a
10. Clear Support Groups if you do not plan to provision groups or if users are not

O ly
categorized into groups on the user directory. Deselecting this option disables the
fields on this page.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-23
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

11. In the text box in the Auto Configure area, enter a unique group identifier, and click
Auto Configure.
Group attributes are displayed in the Group Configuration area.
You can manually enter required group attributes into text boxes
in the Group Configuration area.

Field Description
Group RDN The Relative DN of the group. Each component of a DN is
called an RDN and represents a branch in the directory tree.
This value, which is relative to the Base DN, is used as the
group URL.
Specify a Group RDN that identifies the lowest user directory
node where all the groups that you plan to provision are
available.
The Group RDN has a significant impact on login and search
performance. Because it is the starting point for all group
searches, you must identify the lowest possible node within
which all groups for Oracle's Hyperion products are
available. To ensure optimum performance, the number of
groups present within the Group RDN should not exceed
10,000. If more groups are present, use an appropriate
m y
group filter to retrieve only the groups you want to provision.
Name Attribute The attribute that stores the name of the group.
d e
Object Class
c a
Object classes of the group. Shared Services uses object
classes to find all the groups that are associated with the
user.

e A
c l
You can manually add or delete object classes if needed:
In the Object class box, enter the object class name, and

r a
click Add.

O ly
Select the object class and click Remove.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Field Description
Advanced Filter The check box that when selected, enables the use of a filter
to retrieve groups during search operations.
Limit Groups To LDAP query that retrieves only the groups that are to be
provisioned with Oracle's Hyperion product roles. For
example, the LDAP query (cn=Hyp*) retrieves only groups
whose names start with the prefix Hyp.
Group filters limit the number of groups returned during a
query. They are especially important if the node identified by
the group URL contains many groups that need not be
provisioned. By excluding groups that are not to be
provisioned, you improve performance.
After entering the group filter, click Preview to validate the
query.

12. Click Finish.

Shared Services saves the configuration and returns to the
Defined User Directories page, which now lists the user directory
that you configured.
13. Select the user directory that you configured and click Add under the Search Order
m y
area to add the directory to the search order used by Shared Services.
d e
14. Exit Shared Services console.
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-25
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Provisioning Users and Groups
c l
r a
User provisioning is the process of granting roles and access control to Oracles
Hyperion product users. A role is a set of permissions that determines user access to
O ly
product functions. Each Oracle's Hyperion product provides several default roles tailored

l & On
to suit various business needs. Predefined roles from each Oracle's Hyperion application
registered with Shared Services are available from Shared Services Console. These
a e
roles are used for provisioning. You may also create additional roles that aggregate the
n
t e r s
default roles to suit specific requirements. The process of granting users and groups
specific access permissions to Oracle's Hyperion resources is called provisioning.
U
I n
Provisioning is managed at the user or group levels by Provisioning Managers or Shared
Services Administrators assigning one or more Oracle's Hyperion application roles to a
l e
user or group.
c
r a
O
7-26 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Available Roles
A role is a construct, similar to an access control list, that defines the access permissions
granted to users and groups to perform functions on Oracle's Hyperion resources. It is a
combination of resource or resource types.
Access to Oracle's Hyperion application resources is restricted. Users can access
application resources only after a role that provides access is assigned to the user or to
the group to which the user belongs. Access restrictions based on roles enable
administrators to control and manage application access.
As the Shared Services administrator or provisioning manager for an application, only
you can provision users. Based on roles assigned, users can perform specific tasks and
access content in various applications. You manage provisioning at the user or group
level; that is, you select users or groups and then provision them with roles for
applications or for Shared Services global roles.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-27
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Global Roles
Global roles are Shared Services roles that enable users to perform certain tasks within
the Shared Services Console. The following table describes some global rules:

Role Description
Administrator The Administrator role provides control over all products that
integrate with Shared Services. It enables more control over
security than any other Hyperion product roles and should
therefore be assigned sparingly. Administrators can perform
all administrative tasks in Shared Services Console and can
provision themselves.
This role grants broad access to all applications registered
with Shared Services. The Administrator role is, by default,
assigned to the admin Native Directory user, which is the
only user available after you deploy Shared Services. This
user account is initially used to create accounts for other
administrators. For example, the Shared Services
Administrator assigns other administrative users either the
Directory Manager or Provisioning Manager role (a product
specific role assigned for individual applications). In turn,
these users manage general user access to applications.
Directory Manager Users who are assigned the Directory Manager role can
create and manage users and groups within Native
m y
Directory.
d e
c a
The recommended practice is to grant one user the Directory
Manager role and another user the Provisioning Manager

A
role. Otherwise, Directory Managers can provision
themselves. For example, if a user is assigned both roles for

e
c l
a Financial Management application, this user can create a
new user, assign the user any role within the application, and

r a
log in as the new user, thereby granting personal access to
the Financial Management application.
Project Manager
O ly
Users who are assigned the Project Manager role can create
and manage projects within Shared Services.
LCM Manager
l & On
Users who are assigned the LCM Manager role can execute

n a e
the Artifact Life Cycle Management Utility to promote
artifacts and data across product environments and

t e r U s
operating systems.

Predefined Roles
I n
c l e
Predefined roles are built-in roles in Oracle's Hyperion products. You cannot delete these
roles from the product. Predefined roles are registered with Shared Services during the

a
application registration process.
r
O
7-28 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Aggregated Roles
Aggregated roles are custom roles that aggregate multiple product roles within an
Oracle's Hyperion product. An aggregated role consists of multiple roles, including other
aggregated roles. For example, a Shared Services Administrator or Provisioning
Manager can create a role for Planning that combines the Planner and View User roles
into an aggregated role. Aggregating roles can simplify the administration of products
that have a large number of granular roles.
You cannot create an aggregated role that spans products, and you cannot include
global Shared Services roles in aggregated roles. Aggregated roles are also known as
custom roles.

Provisioning Sequence
Shared Services communicates with the following repositories for provisioning:
The Shared Services relational database contains product registration information.
The OpenLDAP database contains role-provisioning information.
The product repositories contain authentication privileges that are product-specific.
The external authentication directory contains user credentials and group hierarchy
m y
information.
d e
When you log on to a Hyperion product, the product performs the following
authentication tasks:
c a
A
1. The product checks the user credentials in a user directory (native or external).
e
c l
This mandates each Hyperion application user to have an account on the user
directory.
r a
O ly
2. The product communicates with Shared Services to check the verified information
against the role provisioning information in the OpenLDAP database.

l & On
3. The product checks the verified OpenLDAP credentials against the product
credentials.
n a e
t e r
To provision users or groups:
U s
I n
1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start > Programs > Hyperion > Foundation

l e
Services > Shared Services Console.

c
2. Locate a user or group to provision by clicking on your user directory and searching

r afor users or groups.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-29
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

3. Right-click the user or group and select Provision.

The Provisioning tab is displayed.
4. Optional: Select a view.
Roles can be displayed in a hierarchy (tree) or a list. You must drill
down the hierarchy to display available roles. The list view lists all
available roles but does not show their hierarchy.
5. Select one or more roles, and click Add.
The selected roles appear in Selected Roles.
6. Click Save.
A dialog box, which indicates that the provisioning process is
successful, is displayed.
7. Click OK.

Deprovisioning Users and Groups

When you deprovision users or groups, you remove the assigned roles from an
application. Shared Services administrators can deprovision roles from one or more
m y
d e
applications. Provisioning managers of applications can deprovision roles from their
applications. For example, assume that the group Sales_West is provisioned with roles

c a
from Planning and Financial Management. If this group is deprovisioned by a Planning
Provisioning Manager, only the roles from Planning are removed.

e A
To deprovision users or groups:
c l
r a
1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start > Programs > Hyperion > Foundation

O ly
Services > Shared Services Console.

for users or groups.

l & On
2. Locate a user or group to provision by clicking on your user directory and searching

n a e
3. Right-click the user or group, and select Deprovision.

e r s
The Deprovisioning tab is displayed.
t U
I n
4. Perform an action, and click OK.

c l e
Select one or more applications.
Select all available applications by selecting Check All.

r a
5. Click OK.
O
7-30 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

6. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

7. Click OK in the Deprovision Summary page.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-31
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Generating Provisioning Reports

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Generating Provisioning Reports
c l
r a
You can report on user-provisioning information in Shared Services Console.
Provisioning reports can contain information on users and groups assigned to roles from
O ly
selected applications and roles from selected applications assigned to one or more
users.

l & On
n a e
To generate provisioning reports in Shared Ser vices Console:

e r s
1. Select Administration > View Report.
t U
I n
2. Enter report generation parameters.

c l e
3. Click Create Report.
The report is displayed on the Provision Report tab.

r a
O
7-32 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

4. Click Print Preview.

The report is displayed in View Report window.
5. Click Print.
6. Select a printer, and click Print.
7. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-33
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Importing and Exporting Provisioning Data

Components of the Import/Export utility:

Batch (Windows) or shell (UNIX) file to invoke the
operation
Properties file to configure the utility
Sample XML data file
Sample CSV (comma-separated values) data file

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Importing and Exporting Provisioning Data
c l
r a
O ly
You can use the stand-alone, command-line Import/Export utility to export, import, and
validate data related to the following users, groups, and roles:
Users
l & On
Groups
n a e
Roles
t e r U s
I n
Group relationships

l e
Role relationships
c
a
User and group provisioning relationships
r
O
7-34 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

NOTE
You can use the utility to export data from all user directories configured with
Shared Services. You cannot use the utility to import data into external user
directories.

The utility uses the following commands:

CSSImport.bat for importing data
CSSExport.bat for exporting data
CSSValidate.bat for user data validation
You can export and import data into an XML or CSV format. Prior to running the utility,
you must configure the properties file to include the following information:
Configuration properties
Import properties
Export properties
For values required under each property section, see Hyperion EPM System Security
m y
Administration Guide.

d e
You can access the utility from the HYPERION_HOME\common\utilities\ folder.

c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-35
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Creating Application Groups
c l
r a
An application group is a container for Oracle's Hyperion applications. For example, an
application group may contain a Planning application and one or more Reporting and
Analysis applications.
O ly
l & On
Applications that are registered with Shared Services but do not yet belong to a

n a e
application group are listed under Default Application Group node within the Application
Groups node in Shared Services Console.

t e r U s
An application can belong to only one application group, but a application group may

I n
contain multiple applications. You can start the provisioning process even if the
applications are not assigned to application groups. You can provision applications listed

l e
in the Default Application Group node and then move them to a application group without

c
losing provisioning information.

r a
O
7-36 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

NOTE
You must be a Shared Services Administrator or Project Manager to create and
manage application groups. Shared Services Administrators can work with all
registered applications but a Project Manager can work only with the application
for which that person is the project manager.

To create an application group:

1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start > Programs > Hyperion > Foundation
Services > Shared Services Console.
2. Right-click Application Groups in the Object Palette, and select New.
The New Application Group page opens.
3. Enter a unique application group name in Name text box and an optional description
in Description box.
4. Perform these acctions to assign applications to this application group:
m y
existing application group.
d e
a. From List Applications in Application Group, select DefaultApplicationGroup or an

c a
b. Click Update List. The Available Applications list displays the applications that you
can assign to the application group.

e A
click Add.
c l
c. From Available Applications, select the applications to assign to the project and

r a
The selected applications appear in the Assigned Applications list.
5. Click Finish. O ly
6. Perform an action:
l & On
n a e
Click Create Another to create another application group.

e r s
Click OK to close the status page.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-37
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Troubleshooting Shared Services Installations
c
r a
Runtime errors and messages are recorded in log files stored on the Shared Services
server. Shared Services log files are located in
O ly
<Hyperion_home>\logs\SharedServices9.

l & On
The following table describes the available log files:

Log File
n a e Description

t e r
SharedServices_Security.log
U s Security-related error messages about users,
groups, roles, and provisioning operations

I n
SharedServices_Admin.log Messages related to Shared Services Console and

c l e messages reported during Shared Services

runtime

O ra
SharedServices_Metadata.log Metadata management and registration-related
errors and messages

7-38 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration

 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Log File Description

SharedServices_Taskflow.log Taskflow-related errors and messages from
Common Event Services
SharedServices_Taskflow_CMDExecut Taskflow scheduling errors and messages from
e.log Common Event Services
SharedServices_Taskflow_Optimize.log Taskflow optimization errors and messages from
Common Event Services
SharedServices_SyncOpenLDAP.log Messages from the synchronization of Native
Directory with Shared Services database
SharedServices_Security_Client.log Product-specific messages and errors generated
by Hyperion products

Here are a few troubleshooting tips for user provisioning:

Verify connectivity between the machines that host Shared Services and the external
directory servers.
Verify that you have correctly configured your external directory.
Review Shared Services log files.

m y
Troubleshooting User Directories
d e
codes and their description are available at the following Web site:c a
Most LDAP-enabled user directories use a standard set of error codes. These error

e
http://www.directory-info.com/LDAP/LDAPErrorCodes.html A
c l
Error codes specific to MSAD are explained at the following Web site:

r a
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/debug/base/system_error_codes.asp

O ly
Running EPM System Diagnostics
l & On
n a e
EPM System Diagnostics tests the status of installed and configured EPM System
components, diagnoses problems, and assists in problem resolution. Run EPM System

HTML format.
t e r U s
Diagnostics on each machine in the deployment. The results of the tests are saved in

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-39
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

To run EPM System Diagnostics:

1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Foundation Services > Diagnostics Utility.
The EPM System Diagnostic utility launches in a separate
window. Progress is shown in the command window.
2. Navigate to HYPERION_HOME/common/validation/version number/reports and
open validation_report_date_time.html.
3. Look for failed tests, and diagnose and fix problems.
EPM System Diagnostics creates a .zip file of all the logs in
HYPERION_HOME/logszips for your convenience.
4. Run EPM System Diagnostics again and view the report to verify that problems are
solved.

EPM System Diagnostics performs the following checks for Shared Services:

Type of Test
External Authentication
Test Performed
Checks Native Directory external authentication provider
m y
OpenLDAP
configuration
Checked the OpenLDAP connection
d e
Web Application
c a
Verifies that the Web application interop is running on

Database
host:port

e A
Verifies that the database is connected to host:port

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-40 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Describe the EPM System Configurator

Configure Shared Services
Configure External User Directories
Provision Users and Groups
Create and Manage Application Groups
Troubleshoot Shared Services Installations

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 7-41
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 7 Configuring Shared Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
7-42 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 8

Configuring Essbase Services 8

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Configure Essbase Services
Provision users for Essbase Services
Troubleshoot Essbase Services Installations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Configuring Essbase

Embedded Java container

EAS database Server components

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Essbase
c l
r a
Launch EPM System Configurator to guide you through a series of pages to perform the
required Shared Services configuration tasks:
O ly
Registering Essbase, Administration Services, and Provider Services with Shared
Services
l & On
a e
Registering Essbase Server as a Windows service
n
e r s
Configuring the Administration Services database
t U
servers I n
Deploying Essbase, Administration Services, and Provider Services to application

c l e
You can run these configuration tasks separately or all at one time.

r a
O
8-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

EPM System Configurator configures the instance of Essbase that you selected on the
Task Selection panel. If you installed a second instance of Essbase Server, it appears as
Essbase-<n> on the Task Selection panel. For information about configuring an
additional instance of Essbase Server, refer to the EPM System Installation and
Configuration Guide.
During configuration, if you do not select Essbase in Standalone mode, EPM System
Configurator automatically registers Essbase with Shared Services and writes the
Shared Services connection information to the essbase.cfg file.
In Windows, EPM System Configurator automatically sets environment variables. The
Essbase installation location, known as ESSBASEPATH, is also set automatically as a user
variable.

NOTE
The Essbase installation location is stored in a variable. Previous versions of
Essbase used ARBORPATH to refer to the installation location. ARBORPATH
now refers to the application location.

m y
EPM System Configurator Options
d e
You enter the following values during Essbase configurations:
c a
Field Description

e A
Agent Port Number

c lAccept the default port number on which the

Essbase Server listens for client requests. If you

r a change the default value, make sure to enter a

port number that is not used by other programs.

O ly The port value is stored in essbase.cfg.

Start Port
l & On Enter the first port number that Essbase Server
tries to use to connect.
End Port
n a e Enter the highest port number that Essbase

t e r U s Server can use to connect.

Essbase uses at least two ports for each

I n application. For a large number of applications,

you need a larger port range.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 8-3
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Field Description
Application Location The file path for applications. Previous versions
of Essbase used ARBORPATH to refer to the
installation location.
If you are upgrading from a previous release of
Essbase, specify the same application location
you used in the previous release.
Set the language to be used by Essbase The ESSLANG variable is a locale definition,
including a code page specification that maps bit
combinations to characters. For example, to
support American English, you can set
ESSLANG to
English_UnitedStates.Latin1@Binary.
Verify the operating system locale setting on your
computer and select the matching ESSLANG
value. The ESSLANG setting for a computer
must agree with the locale setting of the
computers operating system.
You must choose the correct ESSLANG setting
for Essbase products to start successfully. The
ESSLANG setting can affect the function of
applications and databases.
m y
d e
In Windows, if ESSLANG is already set on the
computer (for example, if you are upgrading from

by default.
c a
a previous release), the current value is selected

e A
For the full list of supported ESSLANG values,
see Hyperion Essbase - System 9 Database

c l
Administrator's Guide.

r a If you are upgrading from a previous release of

Essbase, you cannot change the existing

O ly ESSLANG setting.
Set the ARBORPATH environment
variable
l & On Specify whether you want EPM System
Configurator to update the PATH and

n a e ARBORPATH environment variables.

If you do not update the environment variables

t e r U s during configuration, you must update them

manually.

I n
Essbase in Standalone mode Select to use legacy security for Essbase Server
instead of Shared Services security. The

c l e configuration summary indicates that Essbase

registration with Shared Services failed.

r a
O
8-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Configuring Databases
When configuring the Essbase Administation Services database, you enter the following
values:

Field Description
Database configuration for the following Confirm the list of products for which you
products want to configure the database. The list
displayed is determined by the products you
initially selected to configure.
To create different databases for each
product, select only one product at a time and
run EPM System Configurator again to
configure the database for another product.
Use an existing database Select a previously-configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to
Create new database
configure.
Note: This task assumes you have already
created the database. It will not create the
database.
Database Type Select a database type from the list of
supported database types.
m y
Server
d e
Specify the name of the computer or server
hosting the database.
Port
c a
Select the default or specify a custom server

e A
port number on which the database listens.
Service Name or SID

c l Specify the name of the database.

If you are using an Oracle RAC database,

r a specify the RAC service name.

Username
Password O ly Enter the database user name.
Enter the database user password.
(Optional) Advanced Options
l & On Click to specify additional information.

n a e
Post-Configuration Tasks
t e r U s
After running the EPM System Configurator, you perform the following post-configuration
tasks:
I n
l e
Verify that the Essbase Service was started and set to automatically start
c
a
Start the following services:
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 8-5
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

- Administration Services
- Provider Services
Start Administration Services Console to configure Essbase servers and users

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
Provisioning Users for Essbase
c l
Console. r a
You provision users for Essbase Servers and Provider Services in Shared Services

O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 8-7
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Essbase Roles

Role Description
Administrator Grants full access to administer the server, applications, and
databases.
Application Manager Creates, deletes, and modifies databases and application
settings within the assigned application. Includes Database
Manager permissions for the databases within the assigned
application.
Create/Delete Application Creates and deletes applications and databases within
applications. Includes Manager permissions for the applications
and databases created by this user.
Database Manager Manages the databases, database objects, locks, and sessions
within the assigned application.
Load/Unload Application Starts and stops applications or databases.
Calc Calculates, updates, and reads data values based on the
assigned scope, using any assigned calculations and filter.
Write Updates and reads data values based on the assigned scope,
using any assigned filter.

m y
Filter Accesses specific data and metadata according to the
restrictions of a filter.
d e
Read Read data values.
c a
Server Access
A
Accesses any database that has a default access other than
none.

e
c l
Provider Services Roles
r a
Provider Services provides the Administrator power role, which allows users to create,
O ly
modify, and delete Essbase Server clusters.

l & On
Externalizing Users in Administration Services
n a e
You can migrate Administration Services and Business Rules users, groups, and roles to

e r s
Shared Services. The users and groups are automatically provisioned for use in
t U
Business Rules and other Hyperion products.

I n
c l e
r a
O
8-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Troubleshooting Essbase Services Installations
c
the following tasks: r a
After installing and configuring Essbase, you should verify the installations by performing

O ly
1. Verify that the following Windows services are available:

l & On
Hyperion Essbase Services 11.1.1 - <Service Name>

n a e
Hyperion Administration Services - Web Application

t e r U s
Hyperion Provider Services - Web Application

I n
2. Launch Shared Services Console and verify user provisioning.

l e
3. Launch Administration Services Console and connect to the Essbase Server.
c
r a
4. Before attempting an Essbase client-server connection, test the network protocol
installation to ensure that the connection is installed properly.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 8-9
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Checking Server Connections

Use the PING command on the server to check that the server is running and visible to
the client computer.
If the PING command is successful but the TELNET command is not, there might be
a problem with the inet daemon.
If the PING command is unsuccessful on the server, you might have a routing or
hardware problem.

Viewing Log Files

For configuration errors, you can view EPM System Configurator logs located in the
HYPERION_HOME\common\config\logs directory.
After you start the Essbase Server, agent activities are recorded in the Essbase Server
log (essbase.log), which is stored in the HYPERION_HOME\AnalyticServices directory.
After you start individual applications, application and database activities are recorded in
an application log (appname.log), which is stored in the application directory
(HYPERION_HOME\AnalyticServices\app\appname).

m y
Running EPM System Diagnostics
d e
a
Run EPM System Diagnostics to perform the following checks for Essbase Services:

c
Type of Test Test Performed

e A
External Authentication
l
Checks Native Directory external authentication provider

c
configuration
Shared Services
r a
Checks the availability of Shared Services
Web Application
O ly
Verifies that the Web application eas is running on
host:port

l & On
Verifies that the Web application hbr is running on

n a e
host:port
Verifies that the Web application aps is running on

Database
t e r U s
host:port
Verifies that the database is connected to host:port

I n
Essbase Studio Server Verifies that the server is running on host:port

c l e
r a
O
8-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Configure Essbase Services

Provision users for Essbase Services
Troubleshoot Essbase Services Installations

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 8-11
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 8 Configuring Essbase Services

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
8-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 9

Configuring Planning 9

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Configure Performance Management Architect and Calculation
Manager
Configure Planning
Configure Smart View and Offline Planning
Troubleshoot Planning installations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Configuring Performance Management Architect
c
a
EPM System Configurator enables you to perform the following configuration tasks:
r
Configure Database
O ly
Deploy to Application Server
l & On
n a e
The Interface Datasource Configuration task is required only if you want to use interface
tables in Performance Management Architect. Interface tables are database tables used

e r s
to import data and metadata from external systems into Architect.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Configuring Databases
When configuring the Performance Management Architect system database, you enter
values for the following options:

Field Description
Database configuration for the following Confirm the list of products for which you
products want to configure the database. The list is
determined by the products you initially
selected to configure.
To create different databases for each
product, select only one product at a time and
run EPM System Configurator again to
configure the database for another product.
Use an existing database Select a previously configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to
Create new database
configure.
Note: This task assumes you have already
created the database. It will not create the
database for you.
Database Type Select a database type from the list of
supported database types.
m y
Server
d e
Specify the name of the computer or server
hosting the database.
Port
c a
Select the default or specify a custom server

e A
port number on which the database listens.
Service Name or SID

c l Specify the name of the database.

If you are using an Oracle RAC database,

r a specify the RAC service name.

Username
Password O ly Enter the database user name.
Enter the database user password.
(Optional) Advanced Options
l & On Click to specify additional information.

n a e
t e r U s
Deploying to an Application Server
EPM System Configurator enables you to deploy multiple Hyperion products to one
I n
application server. The application server must be installed on the same computer as the

c l e
products that you are deploying.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-3
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring Calculation Manager
c l
a
You perform the following tasks to configure Calculation Manager:
r
Configure Database
O ly
Deploy to Application Server
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Configuring Databases
When configuring the Calculation Manager database, you enter values for the following
options:

Field Description
Database configuration for the following Confirm the list of products for which you
products want to configure the database. The list is
determined by the products you initially
selected to configure.
To create different databases for each
product, select only one product at a time and
run EPM System Configurator again to
configure the database for another product.
Use an existing database Select a previously configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to
Create new database
configure.
Note: This task assumes you have already
created the database. It will not create the
database for you.
Database Type Select a database type from the list of
supported database types.
m y
Server
d e
Specify the name of the computer or server
hosting the database.
Port
c a
Select the default or specify a custom server

e A
port number on which the database listens.
Service Name or SID

c l Specify the name of the database.

If you are using an Oracle RAC database,

r a specify the RAC service name.

Username
Password O ly Enter the database user name.
Enter the database user password.
(Optional) Advanced Options
l & On Click to specify additional information.

n a e
t e r U s
Deploying to an Application Server
EPM System Configurator enables you to deploy multiple Hyperion products to one
I n
application server. The application server must be installed on the same computer as the

c l e
products that you are deploying.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-5
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring Planning
c l
r a
Before running EPM System Configurator, ensure that you have completed all necessary
installation and configuration tasks for Shared Services and Essbase (including Essbase
Administration Services).
O ly
NOTE
l & On
a e
You must run EPM System Configurator on each computer on which a product is
n
installed.

t e r U s
I n
Before running the configuration process, ensure that the following tasks are completed:

l e
If you are not using the Embedded Java Container installed with Oracles Hyperion

c
products, you must install the application server that you plan to use.

r a
Shared Services server is up and running to enable product registration.

O
9-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

EPM System Configurator enables you to perform multiple configuration tasks in one
session.
Product Options
Common Settings
Configure Database
Deploy to Application Server
When these tasks are completed, you can perform the following Planning-specific tasks:
Product Instance Registration
Data Source Configuration

Configuring Databases
When configuring the Planning system database, you enter values for the following
options:

Field
Database configuration for the following
Description
Confirm the list of products for which you
m y
products
e
want to configure the database. The list is
d
determined by the products you initially
selected to configure.
c a
To create different databases for each

e A
product, select only one product at a time and
run EPM System Configurator again to

c l configure the database for another product.

Use an existing database
Create new database r a Select a previously configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to

O ly configure.

l & On Note: This task assumes you have already

created the database. It will not create the

n a e database for you.

Database Type

t e r U s
Select a database type from the list of
supported database types.
Server

I n Specify the name of the computer or server

hosting the database.
Port

c l e Select the default or specify a custom server

port number on which the database listens.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-7
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Field Description
Service Name or SID Specify the name of the database.
If you are using an Oracle RAC database,
specify the RAC service name.
Username Enter the database user name.
Password Enter the database user password.
(Optional) Advanced Options Click to specify additional information.

NOTE
The Planning system database is typically separate from Planning application
databases. Oracle recommends that you use a separate database for your
Planning system information and a separate database for each Planning
application you deploy.

Deploying to an Application Server

EPM System Configurator enables you to deploy multiple Hyperion products to one
m y
products that you are deploying.
d e
application server. The application server must be installed on the same computer as the

c a
If you are deploying your product to a single application server, you can select one of the
following deployment options:

e A
c l
AutomaticAutomatic deployment type deploys all files to the application server. In
most cases, no other deployment tasks are required.

r a
ManualSee the Oracles Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Manual Deployment Guide.
O ly
Configuring Planning Clusters l & On
n a e
An application server cluster is a set of application servers running the same application.

e r s
Clustered application servers provide load balancing and failover capability, and enable
t U
the servers to be transparently maintained while applications remain available for users.

I n
A server can belong to only one cluster.

c l e
r a
O
9-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Specify the names of the application servers that participate in the cluster.

EPM System Configurator Fields Description

Cluster Name Specify a name for the cluster, or accept the default.
Web Tier Host Name Enter the full name of the machine where you installed
the Planning Web server component.
In a multi-server environment, this should be the load
balancer, and in a single server environment it is the
same as the Planning server.
Server Port Accept the default server port or make a change if
necessary. The port number should be the port used for
application server deployment.
SSL Select to enable SSL.
Activate Cluster Select if you want to display only those applications in
Workspace that are associated with this cluster. If you
want to see all applications in Workspace, do not select
this check box.

You can also edit, delete, and re-associate applications to a cluster in the EPM System
Configurator.
m y
d
If you use multiple application servers connected to one database server, you muste
are not synchronized, the data being viewed might not be current.
c a
ensure that the system clocks on the application servers are synchronized. If the clocks

NOTE

e A
l
Changing the clock settings affects the synchronization between application
c
r a
servers. For the time change to and from Daylight Savings Time, Oracle
recommends that you stop the servers before the time change, and then restart
them afterwards.
O ly
l & On
Creating Product Instances
n a e
properties.
t e r U s
To create an instance, select Create an instance, click Next, and then enter the instance

I n
If you change your server or cluster information after you have created an instance and

c l e
deployed applications from Performance Management Architect, you must edit the
instance. For example, if you add or remove a server from a cluster, add or remove a

r a
cluster, or change a cluster name, you must edit the instance information to be able to
access the deployed applications.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-9
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Defining Data Sources

You must create a data source to link the relational database and the Essbase server.
When you create and deploy an application, you must create a data source and
associate it with an instance.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Configuring Smart View and Offline Planning
c
r a
After installation, Smart View is automatically enabled in Microsoft Office products
(Excel, Word, and PowerPoint). You create a connection to a data source provider by
O ly
using Data Source Manager in the Hyperion menu in Excel, Word, or PowerPoint.

l & On
To use Offline Planning, you create an offline connection by using Planning Take Offline

Planning.
n a e
Wizard. You must provision users with the Offline User role before they can use Offline

t e r U s
I n
Enabling and Disabling Smart View
By default, the Hyperion menu is displayed in the menu bar and the Smart View toolbar

l e
is displayed. You can disable Smart View functionality and enable it again later.
c
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-11
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

To disable Smart View:

1. Select Hyperion > About.
2. Clear the Enable Add-in check box.

To enable Smart View:

1. Select Hyperion > About.
2. Select the Enable Add-in check box.

Connecting to a Data Source

Before you can analyze data using Smart View, you must establish connections to your
data sources. To manage your data source connections, use Data Source Manager. You
can add, delete, and modify connections per Excel instance. The connections managed
by Data SourceManager have no relationship to worksheets. You can establish multiple
connections per Excel instance. After you add data sources in Data Source Manager and
they are displayed, you use Data Source Manager to connect to the data sources.
You can add data sources for Planning, Financial Management, Essbase, Financial
Reporting, Web Analysis, Interactive Reporting, and Production Reporting. You can
m y
displays a list of providers to which you have access. d e
connect to a data source directly, if you know the URL; or Shared Services, which

c a
To add a data source connection:

e A
l
1. In Microsoft Office, select Hyperion > Data Source Manager.
c
r a
The Data Source Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Connect to Provider Services.
O ly
l & On
3. Expand the data source type and select a server.
4. In Connect to Data Source, enter your user name and password to the selected
database.
n a e
5. Click Connect.
t e r U s
I
Taking Forms Offlinen
l e
You use the Take Offline Wizard to take data forms offline.
c
r a
O
9-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

To take data forms offline:

1. In Excel, establish a connection to the online Planning data source that contains the
preferred data form or forms.
2. Select Hyperion > Forms > Take Offline.
The Take Offline Wizard is launched.
3. Select the data forms to take offline, and click Next.
4. Select the dimensions and members to take offline.
The dimensions and members are those displayed in the Page
drop-down lists of the forms you take offline.
5. Create an offline connection, giving it a unique name, and click Finish.
NOTE
To take a data form or group of data forms offline, you must select them and give
them an offline connection name. You can select the offline connection name over
multiple Excel sessions.

m y
The Download Status window displays the names of the outline,
forms, dimensions, and members that are being downloaded for
d e
the offline connection.
When the download process is complete, the message Forms c a
are successfully downloaded is displayed.
e A
6. Click OK.
c l
7. Click Next.
r a
O ly
8. Enter a name and a description for the offline connection.
9. Click Finish.
l & On
a e
10. Click OK, and then click Done.
n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-13
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
Troubleshooting Planning Installations
c l
a
When errors occur during configuration, you must perform the following tasks:
r
O ly
Review the Hyperion Configuration Utility log file that contains configuration errors
and warning messages in a central location:

l & On
<HYPERION_HOME>\common\config\logs\configtool.log

a e
Perform configuration tasks individually for one module at a time
n
t
Reconfiguring Planning e r U s
I n
EPM System Configurator enables you to reconfigure products to incorporate changes in

c l e
your environment such as a different application server. When you redeploy the
application server, the Planning properties file is automatically updated.

r a
To reconfigure, launch EPM System Configurator on the computer hosting the product.

O
9-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

If you reconfigure a database, you must restart the application server afterward.

Troubleshooting Performance Management Architect

If you have trouble logging on to Performance Management Architect, perform these
tasks:
Check Shared Services to ensure that the proper security roles were assigned. The
Shared Services global role of Application Creator must be assigned in order to use
Performance Management Architect.
Verify that the Hyperion EPM Architect Process Manager service has started.
Ensure that .NET Framework is enabled in IIS:
a. Open IIS Manager.
b. In the left panel, select Web Services Extension.
c. In the right panel, select ASP.NET 2.0.
d. Click Enable.
Make sure that the default Web site is started in IIS and is using ASP.NET 2.0.
m y
Troubleshooting Smart View Installations d e
c
Ensure that you have MSXML 4 and MSXML 6 installed on the machine where Smarta
View resides.

e A
Running EPM System Diagnostics
c l
r a
Run EPM System Diagnostics to perform the following checks:

Product/Component O ly
Type of Test Test Performed
Planning
l & On
External Authentication Checks Native Directory external

n a e authentication provider
configuration

t e r U s
Shared Services Checks the availability of Shared
Services

I n Database Verifies that the database is

connected to host:port.

c l e Web Application Verifies that the Web application

r a HyperionPlanning is running on
host:port

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-15
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Product/Component Type of Test Test Performed

Performance Management External Authentication Checks Native Directory external
Architect authentication provider
configuration
Shared Services Checks the availability of Shared
Services
Web Application Verifies that the Web application
awb is running on host:port
Verifies that the Web application
DataSync is running on
host:port
Database Verifies that the database is
connected to host:port.
Calculation Manager External Authentication Checks Native Directory external
authentication provider
configuration
Shared Services Checks the availability of Shared
Services
Web Application Verifies that the Web application
calcmgr is running on host:port
m y
Database
d e
Verifies that the Database is

a
connected to host:port.

c
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Configure Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Configure Planning
Configure Smart View and Offline Planning
Troubleshoot Planning installations

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 9-17
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 9 Configuring Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
9-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 1 0

Configuring Reporting and Analysis 10

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Configure Reporting and Analysis
Provision users for Reporting and Analysis
Troubleshoot Reporting and Analysis installations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Configuring Financial Reporting and Web Analysis
c
r a
After installing the Reporting and Analysis software, you run EPM System Configurator,
which provides these tasks for configuration of Hyperion products:
O ly
Financial Reporting configuration

l
Application server deployment& On
n a e
t e r
Configuring Financial Reporting
U s
The Financial Reporting Configuration task does not require user input. It performs the
following tasks:
I n
l e
Validates dependencies
c
a
Sets up clustering
r
O
10-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

Verifies the operating system type, version, and architecture against requirements
Creates an internal registry of product componets installed on the server
Creates a Hyperion Home script
Creates the Scheduler service

Deploying to Application Servers

Select the application server and deployment type.
You can deploy multiple products to one application server, in a single profile
(WebSphere) or domain (WebLogic). The application server must be installed on the
same computer as the products being deployed. For simplicity, Oracle recommends that
you use the same application server, and domain or profile.
Specify this application server information:

Field Description
Select Server: Select the Web Application Server you installed, and
Automatic
then specify whether you want to deploy
automatically or manually.
m y
Manual
e
If you select Embedded Java Container, you can
deploy automatically only.
d
c a
If you are deploying your product to a single
application server, decide between these deployment
options:

e A
c l
Automatic Deploys all files to the application
server. In most cases, no other deployment tasks

r a are required.
Manual EPM System Configurator places the
O ly necessary Web archives (EAR or WAR) in a
directory to enable manual deployment at a future

l & On time.

n a e If you select Manual, see the Oracle Hyperion

Enterprise Performance Management System

t e r U s Manual Deployment Guide for details.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 10-3
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Provisioning Users for Reporting and Analysis
c
r a
After installing Reporting and Analysis, you provision users in the Shared Services
Console. You must be a Shared Services Administrator or Provisioning Manager to
provision users or groups.
O ly
Reporting and Analysis Roles l & On
n a e
You provision users and groups by assigning combinations of predefined roles to

e r s
achieve product access and functionality.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

Power Roles

Role Description
Reporting and Analysis Conditionally accesses all resources (unless the file is
Administrator locked by no access), but not all functionality; accesses the
Administer and Impact Manager modules
Reporting and Analysis Global Universally and implicitly accesses all resources and
Administrator functionality; accesses the Administer and Impact Manager
modules
Note: Reporting and Analysis Global Administrators can
never be denied access.
Content Manager Manages imported repository content and execute tasks,
with implicit access to all resources (unless the file is locked
by no access); contains the Data Source Publisher role
Schedule Manager Creates and manages events, calendars, time events, public
parameters, and physical resources; creates batches;
contains the Scheduler and Job Manager roles

Interactive Roles

m y
Role
Analyst
Description

d e
Accesses interactive content using full analytic and reporting
functionality
c a
Content Publisher
A
Imports, saves, and modifies batches, books, reports and
documents; creates and modify shortcuts and folders

e
Submitter
l
Submits a block of data for final approval
c
Report Designer
a
Accesses authoring studios to create and distribute
r
documents
Scheduler
O ly
Schedules jobs and batches using the Schedule module;

l & On
navigates the repository and assigns access control;
contains the Explorer and Job Runner roles

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 10-5
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

View Roles

Role Description
Explorer Lists repository content in the Explore module and in context
using the Open dialog box; searches, views, and subscribes
to content
Note: Access to the repository does not grant access to
individual files and folders, which are secured by file
properties and permissions.
Viewer Reviews Workspace content; content is static and accessible
only from the Favorites folder.

For the full list of available Reporting and Analysis roles, see Oracle Hyperion EPM
System Security Administration Guide.

Reporting and Analysis Roles Hierarchy

Roles organize into hierarchies that contain other roles. Reporting and Analysis roles
aggregate into two branches:

Content Manager m y
The Content Manager branch includes the following roles:
d e
Report Designer
c a
Data Source Publisher

e A
Analyst
c l
Job Manager
r a
Scheduler
O ly
Schedule Manager
l & On
a e
The Schedule Manager branch includes the following roles:
n
Job Manager

t e r U s
Scheduler
I n
c l e
For a complete list and sample combinations of Reporting and Analysis roles, see

a
Hyperion Security Administration Guide.
r
O
10-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Troubleshooting Reporting and Analysis Installations
c
r a
Reporting and Analysis generates log files to aid you in troubleshooting services,
servlets, and clients. You use log files to check system status, identify resource
O ly
consumption, and troubleshoot error messages.

Log4j Protocol l & On

n a e
Reporting and Analysis implements the Log4j protocol to control log syntax and

e r s
distribution. Log file configuration is controlled through XML files. You edit the XML files
t U
to determine log levels and log output destinations.

I n
l e
Viewing Configuration Error Log Files
c
All configuration warnings and errors are logged in HYPERION_HOME/logs/config.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 10-7
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

Running EPM System Diagnostics

Run EPM System Diagnostics to perform the following checks:

Product/Component Type of Test Test Performed

Financial Reporting Web Application Verifies that the Web application
hr is running on host:port
Verifies that the Web application
HReports is running on
host:port
Web Analysis Web Application Verifies that the Web application
WebAnalysis is running on
host:port

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Configure Reporting and Analysis

Provision users for Reporting and Analysis
Troubleshoot Reporting and Analysis installations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 10-9
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 10 Configuring Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
10-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 1 1

Configuring Workspace 11

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Configure Workspace
Troubleshoot Workspace Installations

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring Workspace
c l
a
You perform the following tasks to configure Workspace:
r
Configure Database
O ly
Deploy to Application Server
l & On
Web Server Configuration

n a e
e
Configuring the Database
t r U s
panel. I n
You must specify the database settings to use for Workspace on the Task Selection

c l e
r a
O
11-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

EPM System Configurator Options Description

Database configuration for the following Confirm the list of products for which you want to
products configure the database. The list is determined by
the products you initially selected to configure.
To create different databases for each product,
select only one product at a time and run EPM
System Configurator again to configure the
database for another product.
Use an existing database Select a previously configured database, or
specify the name of a new database to configure.
Create new database
Note: This task assumes you have already
created the database. It will not create the
database for you.
Database Type Select a database type from the list of supported
database types.
Server Specify the name of the computer or server
hosting the database.
Port y
Select the default or specify a custom server port
number on which the database listens.
m
Service Name or SID Specify the name of the database.
d e
c a
If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify
the RAC service name.
Username A
Enter the database user name.
e
Password
c l Enter the database user password.
(Optional) Advanced Options
r a Click to specify additional information.

Deploying to Application Servers O ly

l & On
Select the application server and deployment type.

n a e
You can deploy multiple products to one application server, in a single profile

t e r U s
(WebSphere) or domain (WebLogic). The application server must be installed on the
same computer as the products being deployed. For simplicity, Oracle recommends that

I n
you use the same application server, and domain or profile.

l e
Specify this application server information:

c
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 11-3
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

Field Description
Select Server: Select the Web Application Server you installed, and
then specify whether you want to deploy automatically
Automatic
or manually.
Manual
If you select Embedded Java Container, you can
deploy automatically only.
If you are deploying your product to a single
application server, decide between these deployment
options:
Automatic Deploys all files to the application
server. In most cases, no other deployment tasks are
required.
Manual EPM System Configurator places the
necessary Web archives (EAR or WAR) in a
directory to enable manual deployment at a future
time.
If you select Manual, see the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System Manual
Deployment Guide for details.
m y
Configuring the Web Server d e
c
Specify Workspace Web server information, or click Next to accept the defaults.a
A
Information in this panel comes from applications already deployed and recorded in the
e
sequence.
c l
Shared Services Registry, and applications you are deploying in this configuration

r a
If you later deploy any additional products that are in Workspace, run EPM System

O ly
Configurator again and select the Workspace Web Server Configuration task.

EPM System Configurator Option

l & OnDescription
Select Web Server
n a e Select the Web server.
Port
SSL Enabled
t e r U s Specify the Web Server port.
Select to enable SSL.

I n
Location of Web Server Specify or browse to the location of the Web server.

c l e This field is not required if you are using IIS.

r a
Component Enable the check box adjacent to each module to
integrate with Workspace.

O
11-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

EPM System Configurator Option Description

Host For each enabled module, review or edit the host
name and port to which this Web server will proxy
requests. If this installation of the Web server will proxy
requests by way of a load balancer, DNS alias, or other
means of redirection, supply that address here.
Context Review the context path. The context path is the part of
the URL that accesses the deployed Web application.
For example in the following URL, workspace is the
context path:
http://webserverhost.example.com:19000/works
pace
Note: Oracle recommends that you do not change the
context.
Port Review the port numbers for the application server
listen ports for the following applications. The port here
must match the listen port of the deployed application.
For Apache Tomcat, this port is the AJP listen port, not
the HTTP listen port.

The Web server is not an optional component, and must be installed and configured on
m y
manual configuration is required.
d e
the machine on which Workspace is installed. If you want to distribute the installation,

c a
When Reporting and Analysis User Interface Services are distributed among two or more

application server(s) are installed, you must provide the following:

e A
machines, or when configuring a Web server on a machine other than where the

c l
The correct application server hostnamesspecify the machine name and port as

a
part of the EPM System Configurator.
r
O ly
Web server plug-in portsmanually enter the information in the Web server plug-in
configuration file(s).

l & On
See Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Manual Deployment
a e
Guide for details on the required manual configuration
n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 11-5
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

m y
d e
c a
e A
Provisioning Users in Workspace
c l
r a
Workspace does not require specific roles. User and groups are provisioned for Oracle
Hyperion products that are accessible through Workspace.
O ly
You can provision users and groups by accessing the Shared Services Console in
Workspace.
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

m y
d e
c a
e A
Troubleshooting Workspace Installations
c l
products. r a
Terminating configuration for one product does not stop the configuration of other

O ly
Viewing Error Log Files
l & On
a e
All configuration warnings and errors are logged in HYPERION_HOME/logs/config.

n
t e r U s
Use Shared Services Administrator credentials to log on to the WebDAV browser.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 11-7
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

EPM System Diagnostics

Run EPM System Diagnostics to perform the following checks for Workspace:

Type of Test Test Performed

External Authentication Checks Native Directory external authentication provider
configuration
Shared Services Checks availability of Shared Services
Web Application Web application workspace is running on host:port
Database Database is connected to host:port
HTTP Availability of HTTP context:
hr
WebAnalysis
pln
workspace
calcmgr
DataSync
awb
m y
HTTP (Windows only) Is file

d e
HYPERION_HOME/common/httpServers/Apache/2.0.59/bin/i

HTTP (Windows only)

nstallhyperionapacheservice.err empty?

c a
Check string LoadModule jk_module modules/mod_jk in
A
HYPERION_HOME/common/httpServers/Apache/2.0.59/conf/

e
httpd.conf

c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Configure Workspace
Troubleshoot Workspace Installations

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 11-9
 Module 3 Product Configuration
Lesson 11 Configuring Workspace

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
11-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 M O D U L E 4

Post Installation Tasks 11

Overview
In this module, you verify the Planning installation and perform system
maintenance tasks.
Lessons in this module include:
Verifying the Planning Installation
Accessing Reporting and Analysis
Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 L E S S O N 1 2

Verifying the Planning Installation 12

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Create and deploy Planning applications
Provision users for Planning applications
Access Planning in Workspace, Smart View, and Essbase
Administration Services Console

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Verifying the Installation

You verify the Planning Installation by:

Starting required services
Creating and deploying applications
Accessing Planning applications in Workspace, Smart
View, and Essbase Administration Services Console

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Verifying the Installation
c l
r a
You verify the Planning installation by starting the required services per Oracle Hyperion
product, create and deploy applications, and access Planning in Workspace, Smart
O ly
View, or Essbase Administration Services Console.

l & On
Before creating and deploying applications, you must start services based on the
following sequence

n a e
1. Databases

t e
2. Foundation - OpenLDAP
r U s
I n
3. Foundation - Shared Services - Web Application

c l e
4. Workspace - Agent Service

r a
5. Performance Management Architect Services

O
12-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

EPM Architect - Dimension Server (Process Manager)

EPM Architect - Web Application
6. Essbase Services
7. Administration Services - Web Application
8. Provider Services - Web Application
9. Reporting and Analysis
a. Financial Reporting Services
b. Financial Reporting - Web Application
c. Web Analysis- Web Application
10. Planning - Web Application
11. Workspace - Web Application

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-3
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Creating Applications in Performance Management Architect
c
application. r a
An application represents a selection of the Shared Library dimensions required for an

Types of application views: O ly

l & On
Type
a e
Description

n
Generic

t e r
A template that enables you to create an application view without
s
assigning a specific product. A generic application view displays

U
properties for all products.
Planning
I n Planning application view

c l e
Consolidation
Profitability
Financial Management application view
Profitability Management application view

r a
Essbase Analytics Essbase application view

O
12-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

The Application Library displays all application views in Performance Management

Architect. You can create application in the Application Library or Dimension Library
provided that you are assigned the Application Creator role.
You create applications with the Application Wizard. Using the wizard enables you to
create applications with all the required components to ensure successful deployment.
The wizard contains applicable property and dimension information by application type.
For example, you make the designation for plan types for Planning applications but you
would not select plan types for Financial Management applications.
After you create the basic application structure using the wizard, you can add
dimensions and further customize the application.
Creating applications includes the following steps:
1. Plan for application setup
2. Setting up application name, plan types, and default currency
3. Selecting dimensions
4. Configuring application settings
5. Adding dimensions from the Shared Library
m y
6. Activating dimension associations
d e
7. Choosing performance settings
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-5
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Adding Dimensions from the Shared Library

You can drag dimensions from the Shared Library to an

application.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Adding Dimensions from the Shared Library
c l
r a
An application in the Shared Library shows a selection of dimensions required for that
application. After you create an application, it displays in the Application pane in the
Shared Library.
O ly
l & On
You can add dimensions from the Shared Library to an application. You can add a
dimension as local or as shared. If you add a dimension as local, a copy of the dimension

n a e
in the Shared Library is created in the application. The copy is disconnected from the

t e r U s
original in the Shared Library. Changes you make to the original in the Shared Library do
not affect the copy in the application.

I n
If you add a dimension as shared, a copy of the dimension in the Shared Library is

c l e
created in the application. The copy is linked to the original in the Shared Library.
Members added to or deleted from the original in the Shared Library are also added to or

r a
deleted from the application. Changes you make to member properties in the Shared
Library are automatically propagated to the application.
O
12-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

To add dimensions to Applications:

1. Select a dimension from the Shared Library pane.
2. Drag the selected dimension to the application pane.
The Dimension Status Selection dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Local or Shared.
4. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-7
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Configuring Application Settings

Select the application to display the application properties.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Application Settings
c l
a
You configure application-wide settings in the properties grid.
r
To configure application settings:O ly
l & On
1. Select the Planning application name to display its dimension properties in the

the application.
n a e
Properties grid. Properties that you set at the highest level apply to all dimensions in

t e r U s
2. Select the Planning category.

I n
3. Indicate up to five valid plan types: Plan1, Plan2, Plan3, Workforce, and Capex.

l e
4. Set up names for the plan types. Plan type names can contain up to 8 characters.
c
a
5. Select a date format.
r
O
12-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

6. Specify the default currency and indicate whether the planning application contains
multiple currencies.
7. Set the base time periods (monthly, quarterly, or custom), weekly distribution, and
starting fiscal year and month.
NOTE
You cannot change the Start Year. The value for Start Year corresponds to the
first year in the Year dimension.

8. Specify the default Alias Table for the application.

9. You can also view or modify system properties for application.
10. Click Finish.
The Application is displayed in the Shared Library.

To view or modify system properties:

1. In the application pane, select an application.

m y
2. From the Category drop-down list, select System.
3. View or modify the settings. d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-9
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Deploying Applications

Performa nce Manage ment Planning Application server

Archite ct
Dimension server

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Deploying Applications
c l
r a
In Performance Management Architect, you create applications to describe the
dimensionality and other information required for an application. To create the
O ly
application, you first validate, and then deploy the application to a Planning server. The

l & On
deployment process automatically creates an application on the application server. You
validate and deploy applications from the Performance Management Architect
Application Library.
n a e
as follows:
t e r U s
In the Performance Management Architect Application Library, you deploy applications

I n
Validate applications

l e
Deploy applications to a Planning server
c
r a
Create application files in relational and OLAP databases

O
12-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

To deploy applications:
1. Ensure that the Planning Application Server is started.
2. In Workspace, select Navigate > Administer > Application Library.
3. Right-click an application and select Deploy.
4. Optional: If validation errors occur, then you can view validation error details. To
view the number of errors, click View Errors. Then to view the list of errors, click
Details.
5. Set the deploy options:

Option Description
Instance Name Select the Planning instance for which the application should
be deployed. Instances are used to link Performance
Management Architect to a Planning application server.
Application Server Select the Planning Web application server to which the
application is deployed.
Shared Services Project
Purge Transaction
Select the Shared Services project for the application.
Select this option to delete the transaction history after a
m y
history on success
Data Source
successful deployment.

d e
Either select the data source for the application or create a

c a
new one. Data sources link the relational database and the
Essbase server. For Planning, each application must be
associated with a data source.

e A
Create Outline
l
Select this option to deploy an application for the first time or

c
to recreate the Essbase outline.
Refresh Outline
r a
Select this option to refresh the Essbase outline. You use this
option to refresh or update the Essbase outline for an
O ly
application that has already been deployed.
Create Security Filters

l & On
Optional: Use this option to generate security filters for all
users in the application.
Shared Members
n a e
Optional: Use this option to apply access permissions to
Security Filters

t e r
Validate Security Filter
U s
shared members.
Optional: Use this option to identify security filters that exceed
Limit
I n the Essbase security filter limit of 64 kb per row.

c l e
Deploy Rules Deploys rules defined in Calculation Manager.

r a
Reminder:

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-11
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

If you are deploying a Planning application for the first time, select Create Outline
to create the Essbase outline.
6. Click Deploy.
The application is deployed to the Planning Web application
server as a Planning application.
7. Select Navigate > Administer > Library Job Console to view the status of the deployment.
The Library Job Console displays the current job status and the
percent completion. You can click the Attachment link to view an
error log. Should deployment of the application fail, the error log
contains valuable information about the reasons for the failure.
When the deployment is completed, the status and deployment
timestamp are updated in the Application Library, and the
application is deployed to the Planning Web application server as
a Planning application.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Validating Applications

Validate applications from the Application Library

Review the validation job in the Library Job Console
If there are validation errors, review the validation log

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Validating Applications
c l
are met:
r a
You validate applications before deploying them to ensure that the following conditions

O ly
The Start Year property is defined and contains four digits (for example, 2007).

l & On
Members in Year dimensions start with FY, followed by a two-digit year (for example,
FY07).
n a e
t e r U s
The Start Year property and first year in the Year dimension describe the same year
in different formats. For example, if the Start Year is 2007, the first year must be
FY07.
I n
l e
The Start Month property is defined.

c
The Default Alias Table property is defined.

r a
The Default Currency property is defined.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-13
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Applications include predefined dimensions. Single-currency applications require

Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, and Year. Multicurrency applications
require Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, Year, and Currency.
The Base Time Period and Weeks Distribution properties are defined.
At least one plan type is set up. You can add plan types later and redeploy the
applications; however, you cannot delete plan types after deploying the applications.

To validate applications:
1. In Workspace, select Navigate > Administer > Application Library.
2. Right-click an application view and select Validate > Application (V).
The Job Task box is displayed indicating that a job has been
submitted.
3. Select Click here to navigate to jobs.
4. Review the job summary section.
5. Perform an action:

m y
log.
d e
If validation errors occurred, click on the link for the validation log and review the

c
If no validation errors occurred, close the Library Job Console window. a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Creating Essbase Databases

Essbase Cube

Outline .otl
Calculation Script .csc

Report Script .rep

Load Rules .rul

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Creating Essbase Databases
c l
r a
You can create Essbase databases either at the time of deployment or as a separate
action. To create the database outline, you select the Create Outline option when you
deploy the application.
O ly
l & On
An Essbase database is created for each plan type defined in a Planning application to

a e
store and calculate its data. You can store the following objects in an Essbase database:

n
t e r U s
Database outlinesDefine the structure of the multidimensional database consisting
of dimensions and member hierarchies. The file extension is .otl.

I n
Calculation scriptsEnable you to perform custom calculations in addition to the

l e
standard consolidations and the standard mathematical operations defined in the
database outline. The file extension is .csc.
c
r a
Report scriptsDefine reports based on data in one or more databases. The file
extension is .rep.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-15
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Data load rulesDefine editing operations on data files that populate the database.
The file extension is .rul.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Provisioning Users for Planning and Performance
c
Management Architect
r a
Planning provides security at four levels:
O ly
l & On
Users must provide a valid ID and password to log on to the system.
Users can launch only those tasks to which they have access. For example, you can

n a e
allow users to create data forms but not dimension members.

e r s
Users can open only those data forms and task lists (objects) to which they have
t U
access.
I n
Users can view and modify data only for dimension members to which they have
l
access.
c e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-17
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

User Provisioning for Planning Applications

You can grant access to your Planning applications to any user or group in an
authentication directory. When you grant a group access to an application, the users in
the group are also granted access to the application.
You grant access in Shared Services Console.
Security in Planning is based on user privileges. User privileges are system roles and
access rights that can be assigned to users or to groups.
Groups are sets of users who need similar access rights. After users and groups are
defined, you can assign the users and groups access rights to application elements. For
example, you can assign a user or a group access to Entity dimension members or data
forms.

User Provisioning for Dimensions, Data Forms, and Task Lists

Within your Planning application, you can assign access rights for users and groups to
the following application elements:
Object SecurityYou can assign security to specific objects, such as data forms and

form but allow only payroll managers to use the salary expense data form.
m y
task lists. For example, you can allow all users to access the standard expenses data

d e
Data SecurityWith data security, you can protect data and prevent unauthorized

elements in an application.
c a
users from changing data. For example, you can restrict access to certain data

A
Task SecurityTask security determines the tasks in an application that a user can
e
c l
access. You assign task security by assigning a role to a user. Each role is
associated with a set of tasks. For example, interactive users cannot change

r a
dimension members, so the dimension-change option is not available to interactive
members.
O ly
l & On
After establishing or updating user and group security and assigning member access,
you must refresh the Planning application to update to the Essbase security filters.

n a e
t e r U s
User Provisioning for Offline Planning
You can use Offline Planning to work with data forms offline and to synchronize

I n
information back to the Planning server when you are reconnected. You assign the
Offline User role to users and groups to enable Offline Planning privileges.

c l e
r a
O
12-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Accessing Planning in Workspace

Pla nning Menus P lanning toolbar

View
Pane

m y
Content Area

d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Accessing Planning in Workspace
c l
a
After deploying your application view, you launch Workspace to perform these tasks:
r
Build and manage applications
O ly
& On
Execute planning application tasks
l
a e
Perform consolidation application tasks

n
t e r U s
Run or view highly formatted financial and operational reports from most data
sources, including Planning and Financial Management

I n
Conduct high-performance, multidimensional modeling, analysis, and reporting with
Essbase

c l e
Using Interactive Reporting, generate ad hoc relational queries, self-service

r a
reporting, and dashboards against ODBC data sources

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-19
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Run high-volume, enterprise-wide reporting for production reporting

Using Web Analysis, perform interactive ad hoc analysis, presentations, and
reporting of multidimensional data
Generate enterprise metrics for management metrics and analysis and present
information in easy-to-use, personalized, interactive dynamic dashboards
In addition, Workspace provides access to and interaction with other published content,
such as Word or Excel documents. Access to Workspace menus and toolbar features
are based on the users assigned roles and provisioned modules.

Launching Workspace
You launch Workspace from a Web browser by using the following Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) to display the logon page:
http://<web server>:<port number>/workspace
You can obtain the Web server name and port number from the System Administrator.

Opening Planning Applications

m y
d e
In Planning, all data is processed within applications. An application is a related set of
dimensions and dimension members that meet a specific set of analytical or reporting
requirements. For example, you can have an application named Dev used for
c
development and a separate application named Prod to roll out to end users. a
e A
To access Planning applications:
c l
a
1. Select Navigate > Applications > Planning.
r
O ly
2. Select the application that you want to open.

l & On
Optional: Select File > Preferences to make the application that is currently open the
default application. When you log on, the default application is opened automatically

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Accessing Planning in Smart View

Toolbar
Point
page list
of View

Column
hea dings

Data input
cells

Cells w ith
Row
supporting
headings
deta il

Parent me mbe r

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Accessing Planning in Smart View
c l
r a
When you use data forms with Smart View, you have the same functionality as you have
with data forms in Planning. You can view form instructions, adjust data, manipulate data
O ly
by using ad hoc adjustments, lock and spread values to base periods, enter supporting

& On
detail and cell text, and launch business rules.

l
n a e
The Planning server performs validity checks involving user security, metadata access,
and form definition changes in order to synchronize data. The server then saves only

opened in Excel.
t e r U s
incremental changes to the cells that were changed or modified after the data form was

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-21
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Connecting to Data Sources

Before you can access data using Smart View, you must establish connections to your
data sources. You can see whether a data source is connected or disconnected by
viewing the icon next to the data source name in Data Source Manager. If you try to
connect to a data source that is disconnected, you are prompted to log on. If you are
authenticated by external authentication, you are not prompted to log on.

Opening Data Forms in Smart View

After connecting to a Planning data source, you can select a data form to work with in
Excel to enter and adjust data using Smart View. Many functions that you use during
data entry in Planning are also available when you work with data forms in Smart View.
You have access to the same data forms that you have access to in Planning.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Accessing Outlines in Adminstration Services
c
r a
An Essbase database is created for each plan type defined in a Planning application to
store and calculate its data. You can store the following objects in an Essbase database:
O ly
Database outlinesDefine the structure of the multidimensional database consisting

l & On
of dimensions and member hierarchies. The file extension is .otl.

a e
Calculation scriptsEnable you to perform custom calculations in addition to the
n
t e r U s
standard consolidations and the standard mathematical operations defined in the
database outline. The file extension is .csc.

I n
Report scriptsDefine reports based on data in one or more databases. The file

c l e
extension is .rep.
Data load rulesDefine editing operations on data files that populate the database.

r a
The file extension is .rul.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-23
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

After deploying Planning applications, you can perform the following tasks in Essbase
Administration Services Console:
View the database outline
Add formulas to members in the outline
Create load rules for loading data
Load data into databases
Calculate databases (aggregate data)
View log reports and other database server information for troubleshooting

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Create and deploy Planning applications

Provision users for Planning applications
Access Planning in Workspace, Smart View, and Essbase Administration
Services Console

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 12-25
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 12 Verifying the Planning Installation

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
12-26 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 1 3

Accessing Reporting and Analysis 13

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Access Financial Reporting and Web Analysis in Workspace
Access Reports in Smart View

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Accessing Financial Reporting in Workspace

Sort the list by clicking a column header

QtrReports folder Items in the

QtrReports
folder

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Accessing Financial Reporting in Workspace
c l
You can preview reports in two formats:
r a
O ly
Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)Preview reports or snapshots

l & On
Portable Document Format (PDF)Preview or print reports or snapshots that are
displayed in the Web browser in Adobe Acrobat Reader

n a e
Essbase Server must be started so that you can view dynamic reports. When you view a

e r s
dynamic report, the user point of view (POV) is displayed. When you change the user
t U
POV, the report is automatically refreshed to display current data for the new member
selection.
I n
l e
When you view a snapshot report, you see data for a specific point in time. Because the

c
POV is fixed with static data when it is created, the user POV is not displayed when you

r a
view it. A snapshot report is disconnected from the data source and is not updated when
data changes.
O
13-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

To preview reports:
1. In the repository, right-click a report or snapshot.
2. Select Open In.
3. Select HTML Preview or PDF Preview.
The report is displayed in the content area.

Importing Content
You can import Financial Reporting files that are exported from a repository. This process
is useful for moving repository objects from one server to another. The following
Financial Reporting file types can be imported:

FIle Type Extension

Report DES
Snapshot report RPT
Book KBK
Snapshot book KBT
m y
Batch
Grid
BCH
ROG d e
Text or object ROT
c a
Image ROI

e A
Chart ROC
c l
Row and column template ROS
r a
O ly
You can also import zipped files that contain Financial Reporting folders and files. The

l & On
folder paths and files are created during import. After importing a Financial Reporting file,
you modify it to configure general and advanced properties and to assign access
privileges.
n a e
e r s
When you import a file into a repository, Financial Reporting verifies whether the
t U
database connections specified in the file exist in the repository. The following actions

I
occur during import: n
l e
If the imported file contains a database connection that matches a connection in the

c
repository, the file is imported with the matching database connection.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 13-3
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

If the imported file does not contain a database connection that matches a
connection in the repository, you are prompted to select or create a database
connection.

Managing Financial Reporting Database Connections

Database connections define the data sources for the grids of Financial Reporting files.
For repository files, you can create, edit, delete, and change database connections. This
ability enables you to reassign database connections, when you move items from one
server to another, and to point repository files to a various servers and applications.
In Database Connection Manager, you manage database connections and, for each
connection, provide the following information:
Database connection name
Data source typeEssbase, Financial Management, Planning, SAPBW, or MS
OLAP
Connection path
Authentication information.

m y
To add database connections:
d e
1. Select Tools > Database Connection Manager.
c a
list of database connections.
e A
The Database Connection Manager dialog box is displayed with a

2. Click New.
c l
r a
The Database Connection Properties dialog box is displayed.

O ly
3. In the Database Connection Name text box, enter a unique database connection
name.
l & On
a e
4. From the Type drop-down list, select a data source type.

n
t e r U s
5. For the data source type, enter the required information and click OK.
The new database connection is displayed in the Database

I n
Connection Manager dialog box.

l e
6. Click Close.

c
r a
O
13-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Exporting Reports to Excel

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Exporting Reports to Excel
c l
spreadsheet. r a
After previewing a report in HTML or PDF, you can export the report to a Microsoft Excel

O ly
When you export a report to Excel, you choose one of the following options:

l & On
Fully Formatted Grids and TextThe current page of the report is exported to
a e
Excel in a format that is similar to its format in Financial Reporting. The report is
n
t e r U s
converted to HTML with the Hyperion formatting definitions and calculated numbers.
Charts in the report are exported as images. To export multiple pages, you display

n
and export one page at a time.
I
l e
Query-Ready Grids and TextThe first grid in the report is exported to Excel. The
grid is converted to HTML, and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed. Images and
c
r a
charts in the report are not exported. After the grid is exported, you connect to an
Essbase server and use Smart View to perform ad hoc analysis.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 13-5
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Accessing Web Analysis in Workspace

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Accessing Web Analysis in Workspace
c l
Format (PDF) from Workspace. r a
You can preview Web Analysis documents in HTML or Adobe Portable Document

PDF printing options: O ly

l & On
Print ScreenPrints the current display quickly and easily. Because documents can
a e
contain multiple data objects, Print Screen does not specify OLAP pages. If you want
n
t e
Print Selected Object.r U s
to include OLAP pages or object-specific document summaries, you should select

I n
Print Selected ObjectPrints the selected document and its specified OLAP pages.

c l e
r a
O
13-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Using POV Definitions in Workspace

You cannot create or activate POV definitions in Workspace. However, you can select
database connections with activated POV definitions and apply the definitions to
documents that you are creating. Workspace users cannot apply POV definitions to
documents.

Managing Web Analysis Database Connections

You must use Web Analysis Studio, not Web Analysis, to create and modify database
connections. Documents are dependent on database connection files to query data
sources. A document can use multiple database connections to connect to one or more
data sources.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 13-7
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Accessing Reporting and Analysis in Smart View
c
r a
You can use Smart View to enter and analyze data from a single Excel interface. Smart
View provides integration with Microsoft Office not only for Planning but also for Financial
O ly
Management, Essbase, Web Analysis, Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, and
Production Reporting.

l & On
n a e
Tasks that previously were repeated across products are now performed only once. The
use of a single interface enables you to utilize multiple products simultaneously. Tight

t e r U s
integration of Smart View enables you to perform the following tasks:

n
Import content into the Microsoft products Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook
I
c l e
Utilize Office smart tags to add single data values and import reports
Distribute and share Office documents by logging on only once to the data source

r a
O
13-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Expose functions for Financial Management and Essbase content in Word, PowerPoint,
and Outlook.
You can use Smart View to import reporting and analysis content from Financial
Reporting, Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting, and Web Analysis into Excel,
Word, or PowerPoint. This content can consist of reports, dashboards, and charts from
the following products:
From Financial Reporting and Web Analysis, you can import reports.
From Interactive Reporting, you can import charts, dashboards, and reports (first
page only).
From Production Reporting, you can import reports.
In Smart View, you use Data Source Manager, a Microsoft Office interface, to work with
data contained in a data source.
Data sources are unique and consist of the following:
Data source type
Product server name
Product server URL m y
Application
d e
Database or cube
c a
Data form (only for Planning)
e A
c l
Before you can analyze data using Smart View, you must establish connections to your

type you use. r a

data sources and how you connect to those data sources depends on the data source

Data source types can be: O ly

l & On
Common Provider Connections: For Essbase, Planning, and Oracle BI EE. These
a e
data sources are connected through a common provider, Provider Services, and
n
t e r U s
managed through the Data Source Manager.

I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 13-9
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Independant Provider Connections: Financial Management, Reporting and

Analysis, and Hyperion Enterprise data sources are connected directly through
Shared Services..
NOTE
If you upgrade Smart View from a previous version, you can use Data Source
Manager to migrate Essbase connections.

Smart Slices
Smart Slices are subset views of a data source. When users connect to Smart View, they
can connect to a Smart Slice or the entire data source.

To connect to a common provider data source:

1. In Office, select Hyperion > Data Source Manager.
The Data Source Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Connect to Provider Services.
The Data Source Manager displays an expandable tree list of
m y
available data sources.
d e
server.
c a
3. From the Data Source Manager tree view, expand a data source type and select a

The Connect to Data Source dialog box is displayed.

e A
l
4. For the selected database, enter your user name and password.
c
5. Click Connect.
r a
O ly
You are connected to the data sources down to the Smart Slice level for which you have
privileges.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Access Financial Reporting and Web Analysis in Workspace

Access Reports in Smart View

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 13-11
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 13 Accessing Reporting and Analysis

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
13-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 L E S S O N 1 4

Performing System Maintenance and

Upgrades 14

Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
Identify backup and recovery requirements
Migrate users and groups
Upgrade Planning applications
Migrate data and metadata

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Backup and Recovery Checklist

Databases, applications, and application data

File system - product directories and deployed application
directories
Operating system registry
Product-specific components

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Backup and Recovery Checklist
c l
r a
System failures can devastate businesses, resulting in lost data, time and revenue, and
creating user dissatisfaction. Whether you use one database or multiple databases
O ly
storing terabytes of data, Oracle recommends that you protect yourself from significant

recovery plan.
l & On
losses in data, time, and resources by developing and implementing a backup and

n a e
You should back up the following types of events:

t e r U s
Before refreshing applications

I n
Before moving applications to another server

l e
Before upgrading applications

c
a
As your business dictates (for example, at key planning milestones)
r
OYou must stop running services before performing data backups.

14-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration

 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Databases, Applications, and Application Data

The frequency of backups is dependent upon the volatility of the database and server
environment, as well as upon the demand for quick database restores in the event of
server crashes. Backing up Planning includes backing up configuration files, relational
databases, Essbase applications, and OpenLDAP databases.
The following table describes the types of database backups:

Backup Type Description

Logical Full Enables you to copy the following items across
environments that use different components (such as
operating systems):
Entire applications
Data repositories such as the Shared Services registry
Individual artifacts such as scripts, data forms, and rule
files
You can use the Life Cycle Management (LCM) utility
provided with Shared Services to back up a variety of data to
another environment. See Hyperion EPM System Lifecycle
Management Guide.

m y
Logical Export
e
Generates necessary SQL statements to obtain all table data

d
that is written to a binary file. Logical export does not contain

c a
database instance-related information such as the physical
disk location, so you can restore the same data on another
database machine. Periodic logical exports (at least once

e
machine is unavailable. A
per week) are useful if physical backups fail or the database

Physical Full
c l
Creates a copy of data that can include parts of a database

r a
such as the control file, transaction files (redo logs), archive
files, and data files. This backup type protects data from

O ly
application error and safeguards against unexpected loss by
providing a way to restore original data. Perform this backup

l & On
once per week or every other week.
You can use the LCM utility to perform this backup type.
Physical Incremental
n a e
Captures only changes after the previous full backup. The

t e r U s
files differ for databases, but in general, the incremental
backup files can be applied on top of the full backup to bring

I n the database to the latest state. Incremental backups can be

done during normal use; however, database performance is

c l e slow during incremental backups, so consider how best to

schedule this operation.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-3
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

You back up your database using the vendor documentation specific to your database
type. Oracle recommends that you back up all databases, including:
The database that houses your application data
The database from which you extract data for use in product applications (if
applicable).
The database that contains the Shared Services registry
The Shared Services OpenLDAP database

File System
You must regularly back up servers, applications, databases, directory structures, and
other required Planning components.

Backup Type Description

Complete Backs up an entire system directory. For example, backing
up <HYPERION_HOME> backs up all Hyperion products
that you installed.
m y
Post-installation
e
Backs up directories created or modified if you reconfigure
products.
d
Daily Incremental
c a
Backs up new directories or files or those modified since the

Weekly-full
e A
previous day. This includes repository content and log files.
Backs up all files in the directories for which you do
l
incremental backups on a daily basis.
c
As-needed
a
Backs up data that is not frequently modified.
r
O ly
You back up directories and files by copying them to another location or storage device.

l & On
You can also use utilities provided with your operating system, such as the Windows
2000 Backup Utility. In the event of a failure or crash, restore these directories and files
a e
by returning the copy to the original location.
n
e r s
Oracle recommends you backup the following files:
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

File Description
Workspace search index files in Backs up Workspace search index files
<HYPERION_HOME>/common/workspacert/9.
5.0.0/wsearch
The <HYPERION HOME> directory Backs up all Oracle Hyperion products
All individual product directories in Backs up individual products
<HYPERION_HOME>/product/
The Shared Services Registry properties file: Backs up the configuration and
<HYPERION_HOME>/Common/Config/reg.pro reconfiguration settings written to the Shared
perties Services Registry.
The product deployment directory. By default: Backs up the web applications used to deploy
<HYPERION_HOME>/deployments/ product applications.
The directory of the application server Backs up application server specific files.
deploying product applications, such as
C:/BEA
The vpd.properties in one of these Backs up the file that enables you to uninstall
locations:
C:\Windows
products.

m y
C:\Documents and Settings
d e
C:\Program Files\Common
Files\InstallShield\Universal
c a
e A
Operating System Registry
c l
r a
Oracle recommends you backup the operating system registry, including installation and
configuration entries such as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\HyperionSolutions.

O ly
You can back up system and product components (such as services) using the regedit
command on Microsoft Windows to create a registry file.

l & On
To use regedit:
n a e
1. Select Start > Run.

t e r U s
I n
2. Enter regedit and click OK.
3. Select the component to back up, right-click and select Export.

c l e
4. Provide a name and location for the registry file. For example,

r aFinancialManagementServer.reg.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-5
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

5. Run the file to restore the component in the event of a failure or crash.

Product-Specific Components
Oracle recommends that you backup product-specific components on a daily basis or as
your business requirements dictates. Ensure that you backup all databases used by
Oracle Hyperion products.

Planning
You can use the file system backup software of your choice. You can back up specific
directories or files, or you can back up the entire Planning directory structure.
Back up the OS System folder where it contains Planning Shared Libraries, such as
C:/Windows/System32.
Make sure to backup the following property files:
PlanningCalcMgrLog4j.properties
PlanningSystemDB.properties
HBRServer.properties
m y
essbase.properties

d e
Essbase
c a
You must often back up the following Essbase components:
Applications
e A
Calculation Scripts c l
Security files r a
Configuration settings O ly
l & On
File System Backup You can use the file system backup software of your choice. You
a e
can back up specific directories or files, or you can back up the entire Essbase
n
t e r U s
directory structure. Back up all .ind and .pag files related to a database because a
single database can have multiple .ind and .pag files. Shut down the Agent before

n
backing up essbase.sec.
I
c l e
r a
O
14-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Data Export in a Text Format You can export data copies to a file that you specify. If
you export to a text file, Essbase does not compress data. The text export file
contains data only and does not include control, outline, or security information.
You can use text export files to load data from the source database into databases on
other platforms. Consider exporting data for the following purposes:
- To transfer data across platforms
- To back up only part of the data; for example, level 0 blocks
- To create an exported file in text format, rather than binary format
You can export data using the following tools:
- Essbase Administration Services
- Report Writer
- ESSCMD
- MaxL

Business Rules
m y
directory.
d e
Back up the Oracle's Hyperion Business Rules .properties file in the WEB-INF/classes

Reporting and Analysis c a

You must back up the following items in your system:
e A
c l
File system, which contains Reporting and Analysis content and other system

a
information (including files in other directories and on other hosts)
r
O ly
Repository database, which contains user and item metadata

& On
Report registry keys from the same point in time (Windows only)

l
Shared Services

n a e
t e
and restart the services.r U s
To recover data, restore the database and file system backups (and registry, if required),

Shared Services I n
l e
To enable recovery from catastrophic failure, back up data sources simultaneously to
c
ensure synchronization.

r a
For Shared Services, you should back up the following components:
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-7
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Shared Services Registry using Life Cycle Management.

The OpenLDAP database and log files.
- Ensure that the Shared Services Repository is in online backup mode.
- Run <HYPERION_HOME>\Foundation\server\scripts\backup.bat <backup
folder>
Configuration files in the file system
Relational database for the Shared Services store event and administrator
Files in <HYPERION_HOME>/deployments/<application
server>/SharedServices9/config:
- WorkflowEngine.properties
- scheduler.properties
The <HYPERION_HOME>/products/Foundation/SharedServices/server/scripts
directory.
User provisioning information using the to export, import, or validate provisioning
data in the <HYPERION_HOME>/common/utilities/CSSImportExportUtility directory.
m y
d e
To recover Shared Ser vices:
1. Stop all product and related services. c a
e A
2. Restore the file system by returning directories to their original location.

c l
3. Recover the relational and OpenLDAP databases. Ensure that the time stamps

r a
match or are similar. See Chapter 7 of the Hyperion EPM System Security
Administrator's Guide.
O ly
l & On
4. Run the Sync OpenLDAP utility. See Chapter 9 of the Hyperion EPM System
Security Administration Guide.

n
5. Stop the OpenLDAP service.a e
6. Perform a task:
t e r U s
I n
For a non-catastrophic recovery run:
<HYPERION_HOME>\products\Foundation\server\scripts\recover.bat

l e
<backup_folder>
c
r a
O
14-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

For a catastrophic recovery, run:

<HYPERION_HOME>\products\Foundation\server\scripts\recover.bat
<backup_folder> catRecovery

Running the Sync Native Directory Utility

To ensure that the Shared Services relational and OpenLDAP databases are
synchronized, run the Sync Native Directory utility.
The database configured with Shared Services stores information related to product
registration. The Native Directory (OpenLDAP) database contains provisioning data for
all products. These databases work together to support Hyperion products.
Data inconsistencies between the databases impact normal operations. Inconsistencies
could occur during manual database updates or database upgrades or in replicated
Native Directory environments in which the Native Directory slave has taken over for a
failed Native Directory master.
To remove inconsistencies, you must synchronize the Native Directory database with the
Shared Services database. The synchronization process uses the Shared Services
database as the master database to resolve data inconsistencies.

m y
To synchronize the OpenLDAP database with the Shared Ser vices
repositor y: d e
1. Launch Shared Services Console.
c a
2. Select Administration > Sync Native Directory.
e A
c l
The Sync Native Directory tab displays the status of the
synchronization operation.
r a
O ly
3. Optional: Click Refresh to update the status.

l & On
4. Optional: Click View Log to display a log file that details the operations that were
performed during the synchronization process.

n a e
t e r U s
Enterprise Performance Management Architect
I n
Make sure you often backup the Performance Management Architect database.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-9
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

To backup Enterprise Performance Management Architect:

1. Stop all product and related services.
2. Back up the <HYPERION HOME>/products/foundation/bpma directory.

To recover Enterprise Performance Management Architect:

1. Restore the components that you backed up.
2. Install the product services by running:
%HYPERION_HOME%\products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer\Se
rverEngine\bin\Services_build_helper.exe.
3. Create a virtual directory for hyperion-bpma-server in IIS that references:
%HYPERION_HOME%\products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer\We
bServices.
4. Ensure the .Net version of the web app is 2.0 and enable the ASP.NET 2.0
extension.
5. Ensure that the ASP.NET user has read/execute permissions to:
%HYPERION_HOME%\products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer\We
bServices, and write permissions to: <web services>\temp. m y
d e
6. Run the following scripts in C:\<HYPERION_HOME>\deployments\<appserver>\bin:
installServiceEPMADataSynchronizer.bat
c a
installServiceEPMAWebServer.bat
e A
c l
The J2EE web services are installed.

r a
7. Restart the product and any related services.

O ly
Calculation Manager

l & On
To enable recovery after a failure, you need only backup the database that you use with

a e
the product as described in your database vendor documentation suite. As an extra
n
t e r
precaution, you could back up the product components in
s
C:/<HYPERION_HOME>/products/Foundation/CALC.
U
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Workspace

To backup Workspace:
1. Stop all product and related services.
2. Back up the Windows registry and the Workspace repository database.
3. Back up ANDALE fonts in C:/Windows/fonts/ANDALE*.ttf (Windows 2000) or
C:/Documents and Settings/<user>/WINDOWS/fonts/ANDALE*.ttf (Windows
2003).
4. Copy the following directories to a storage device or another location:
<HYPERION_HOME>\products\Foundation\workspace
<HYPERION_HOME>\products\biplus\common\SQR\lib
<HYPERION_HOME>\products\biplus\DDS
<HYPERION_HOME>\common\JDBC
<HYPERION_HOME>\common\workspacert\9.5.0.0.\wsearch
<HYPERION_HOME>\common\ODBC
m y
<HYPERION_HOME>\common\JDBC
d e
5. Copy the following files to a storage device or another location:
c a
A
<HYPERION_HOME>/deployments/<AppServer>/<Workspace>/<AppServer>/WEB-

e
INF/config.ws.conf

c l
INF/conf/BPMServer.properties
r a
<HYPERION_HOME>/deployments/<AppServer>/<Workspace>/<AppServer>/WEB-

O ly
<HYPERION_HOME>/deployments/<AppServer>/<Workspace>/<AppServer>/WEB-
INF.web.xml
l & On
To recover Workspace:
n a e
t e r s
1. Recover all the components you backed up including the registry and the repository
U
I n
database.Place the directories and files that you copied in the original location.
2. Run the Sync OpenLDAP utility. See the Hyperion EPM System Security
l e
Administrator's Guide.
c
r a
3. Restart all product and related services.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-11
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

4. Restart all servers.

Smart View
To backup Smart View, you need to copy the Microsoft Office files such as the following
that contain your generated data, and place them on a storage device or in another
location:
Excel files (.XLS)
Word files (.DOC)
PowerPoint (.PPT)
To recover data after a failure or crash, replace the copied files to the original location.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Upgrading Checklist

Verifying release compatibility

Backing up required information
Stopping all services
Installing new EPM System software
Configuring and validating installation
Performing post-configuration tasks

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Upgrading Checklist
c l
r a
You use the EPM System Installer and EPM System Configurator to upgrade your EPM
installation. These utilities have automated many of the steps that were previously
O ly
required during the upgrade process. Additionally, the EPM System Installer gives you

& On
the option of uninstalling older product versions.

l
n
several important functions: a e
During an upgrade, the EPM System Installer and EPM System Configurator perform

t
EPM System Installer
e r U s
I n
- Allows installation of multiple products on a single machine in one pass

l e
- Optionally, uninstalls older product versions leaving property, configuration and

c
data files needed for upgrade.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-13
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

- Runs scripts in the background to transfer required information to the current

release
EPM System Configurator
- Creates the Shared Services Registry in Shared Services during the Configure
Database task
- Registers products with Shared Services database during configuration (no task
needs to be selected)
- Executes upgrade scripts to automatically bring needed configuration information
into the Shared Services Registry
The following tasks are performed by EPM System Installer and EPM System
Configurator as part of the upgrade process:

Automated Actions by EPM System Installer and EPM

Product System Configurator
Common Components Moves Registry.properties (licensing information)
from 9.2.1 or 9.3.1 release
m y
Shared Services
e
Database upgraded to current release and registry is
created
d
Moves: OpenLDAP data and CSS.xml
c a
Enterprise Performance
Management Architect
Database upgraded to current release

e A
Workspace and Reporting
c l
Reads existing server.xml for setup, GSM, LSM, and
and Analysis
a
DB access info, IR services, and retrieve portal

r
services UUID, ports and home location from database.

O ly
For any missing services, default and disabled entries
are added.

l & On
Existing data sources are collected from server.xml and
persisted in registry.

n a e
Writes registry values for all Foundation services

t e r U s
Ensures that services are added and enabled
Updates the repository location

I n Removes Authentication and Name Server service

c l e entries in V8_service_agent table

Upgrades existing SQL script

Ora
Financial Management Database is upgraded to current release

14-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration

 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

ou perform the following tasks to upgrade your installation.

To upgrade your installation:

1. Review release compatibility, system requirements, and other prerequisites for this
release.
2. Back up required information (for example, databases, applications) from the prior
release.
3. Stop all processes and services.
4. Install EPM System products, choosing the Upgrade from a previous release
option.
5. Configure Shared Services and validate that Shared Services is running.
6. Configure other products one at a time using the EPM System Configurator.
Configure Workspace last.
7. Optional: Manually deploy if you did not automatically deploy to a Web application
server.
8. Confirm that services are started.
m y
9. Validate using EPM System Diagnostics.
d e
10. Complete post-configuration product-specific tasks.
c a
11. Perform product-specific upgrade tasks:

e A
l
For Financial Management, use the Schema Upgrade Utility to upgrade
c
applications.
r a
If you want to create applications using Enterprise Performance Management
O ly
Architect, move applications from Classic Financial Management.

l & On
12. Perform security or provisioning tasks if required:

n a e
If this is the first time using Shared Services security, transfer users and groups to
Shared Services

t e r U s
If implementing the unique identity attribute for the first time, or if you changed user
I n
directories, update user directory configuration.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-15
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

About Supported Upgrade Paths

You can upgrade to release 11.1.1 from the following versions

and their associated maintenance releases:
9.3.x
9.2.1
9.2.0.3

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
About Supported Upgrade Paths
c l
r a
Most products can be directly upgraded to the 11.1.1 release. This means that you can
install and configure with the earlier release on the same machine. You are prompted
O ly
whether or not to remove the earlier release. Once upgraded, you can not use earlier
releases on newer applications.

l & On
n a e
If you are using a release earlier than 9.2.0.3, you must first upgrade to one of the
releases noted above, and then upgrade to 11.1.1. For upgrade procedures, see the

t e r U s
product installation guides for the products you are using.

I n
l
NOTE

c e
You cannot upgrade FDM directly. You must uninstall the older version and install

r a the 11.1.1 release. After uninstalling FDM, you must reboot the server.

O
14-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

The 11.1.1 release is backward compatible with the 9.2.x and 9.3.x releases. This means
that once you upgrade Shared Services and Workspace to the 11.1.1 version, you can
still work with Planning or Financial Management versions 9.2.x or 9.3.x. Consult the
Release Compatibility table and Limitations section in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise
Performance Management System Installation Start Here to be sure which products
work together. If you are upgrading any products to Release 11.1.1, you must upgrade
Shared Services, Workspace and Reporting and Analysis to 11.1.1.
Before you proceed with an upgrade, ensure that you have backed up information from
the prior release including databases, applications and other files. For instructions, see
the documentation from the earlier release.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-17
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
Migrating Users and Groups
c l
r a
Planning uses Shared Services to manage user and group roles. By default, Essbase
Server is in native security mode when installed. To use Shared Services security, you
O ly
must migrate Essbase Server and existing Essbase users and groups to Shared

l & On
Services. When you migrate to Shared Services, Essbase users and groups are
converted to equivalent roles in Shared Services.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Moving Applications to Performance Management Architect
c
r a
If you move an application created in Classic Application Administration to Performance
Management Architect, an application cannot return to Classic Application
Administration.
O ly
l & On
In order to move an application to Enterprise Performance Management Architect, the

a e
application must already be upgraded to version 11.1.1.

n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-19
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

To move upgraded applications to Enterprise Performance

Management Architect:
1. In Workspace, select Navigate > Administer > Application Upgrade.
2. Review the Welcome screen, and click Next.
The Upgrade Summary page displays the applications to which
the user has access to upgrade (this information is provided from
the Shared Services server. If an application cannot be upgraded,
an explanation is provided.)
3. On the Select Applications page, add applications that you want to upgrade to the
Applications to Upgrade list and click Next.
4. Review the summary of applications to upgrade, and click Next to execute the
upgrade.
5. Click Finish to view the upgrade process in the Job Console.
6. Open the Application Library to confirm that the applications are in Performance
Management Architect.
7. Navigate to Dimension Library and review the dimensions that were added to
Enterprise Performance Management Architect. m y
8. Open the application.
d e
c a
TIP

e A
c l
If the transfer of applications to Performance Management Architect is not
successful, you can view detailed information in the Import Job log in the Job
Console.
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
Upgrading Applications in Planning
c l
r a
Planning applications are automatically upgraded during configuration. However, you
must register each application in Shared Services.
O ly
& On
To register Planning applications with Shared Ser vices:
l
a e
1. In Planning, select Administration > Application Settings > Advanced Settings > Shared
n
Services Settings.

t e r U
2 Enter the Shared Services URL. s
I n
3 Click Register Shared Services.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-21
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
Migrating Data and Metadata
c l
r a
Migration is the process of copying all or part of an application instance from one
operating environment to another. You use Lifecycle Management (LCM) to migrate the
O ly
application, repository, or individual artifacts across product environments and operating

l & On
systems. For more information on upgrading data and metadata, refer to Appendix A:
Migrating Artifacts with Life Cycle Management.

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Identify backup and recovery requirements

Migrate users and groups
Upgrade Planning applications
Migrate data and metadata

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration 14-23
 Module 4 Post Installation Tasks
Lesson 14 Performing System Maintenance and Upgrades

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
14-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 M O D U L E 5

Appendices 14

Overview
In this module, you learn about Lifecycle Management and Financial Data
Quality Management.
Appendices in this module include:
Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management
Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 A P P E N D I X A

Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle

Management A

Objectives
At the end of this appendix, you should be able to:
Describe Lifecycle Management features and requirements
Import and export Artifacts
Migrate Applications or Artifacts
View LCM Reports

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Lifecycle Management (LCM) Overview
c l
r a
After you successfully deploy an application in an environment, you can use Lifecycle
Management (LCM) to migrate the application, repository, or individual artifacts across
O ly
product environments and operating systems. Migration is the process of copying all or

l & On
part of an application instance from one operating environment to another. For example,
you can migrate an application from development to test or from test to production.
a e
Artifacts are individual application or repository items; for example, scripts, Web and data
n
t e r U s
forms, rules files, documents, financial reports, and so forth.

I n
c l e
r a
O
A-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Migration on Connected and Disconnected Environments
c
a
You can install applications on connected or disconnected environments.
r
O ly
You install applications on connected environments when the source and destination
environments are registered for the same instance of Shared Services. You can
& On
migrate applications directly or through an intermediary file.
l
a e
You install applications on disconnected environments when the source and
n
t e r
destination environments are registered for different instances of Shared Services.
s
For example, you can register the test and production environments for their
U
n
individual Shared Services. You migrate applications through an intermediary file.
I
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-3
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Lifecycle Management Requirements

Note the requirements below as you use the LCM functionality.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Lifecycle Management Requirements
c l
a
Shared Services and the core product must be installed and configured.
r
O ly
Source and destination applications must be registered with an instance of Shared
Services.

l & On
During export, Shared Services source applications must be running. During import,

a e
Shared Services destination applications must be running.
n
t e r U s
For application-to-application migrations, the source and destination applications
must be registered with the same Shared Services instance and should be

I n
accessible to Shared Services Console on the network.

l e
If migrating to or from a file system, the file system should be accessible to Shared

c
Services Console on the network.

r a
O
A-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Since the default destination for file system migrations is on the Shared Services
Web application server computer, ensure that space is allocated on the Shared
Services computer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-5
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

LCM Security

In order to use LCM, a user must have an administrator role

and a Lifecycle Management administrator role. With the LCM
administrator role, you can perform LCM on any application
registered with Shared Services.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
LCM Security
c l
r a
To use Lifecycle Management, you must provision users and groups using the standard
provisioning process. You must be provisioned with the following roles to use LCM with
Planning:
O ly
Planning Administrator
l & On
a e
Shared Services Administrator - LCM Administrator
n
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Exploring Artifacts

Dimensions/
Forms Hierarchies Reports

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Exploring Artifacts
c l
r a
An artifact is an individual application or repository item; for example, scripts, forms,
rules files, Interactive Reporting documents, and financial reports. Also known as an
object.
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-7
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Planning Artifacts

Configuration Data Global Plan Types Security

Artifacts
User Preferences Planning Substitution Plan Type 1 Access Permissions
Units Variables

User Variables Cell Text Business Plan Type 2

Rules

Application Text Values Task Lists Plan Type 3

Settings

Account Spread
Annotations Patterns

Supporting and more

Details

m y
Note: Artifacts vary by implementation

d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Planning Artifacts
c l
a
You use Lifecycle Management to migrate these types of Planning artifacts:
r
Configuration
O ly
Data

l & On
Global Artifacts

n a e
Plan Types
Security
t e r U s
I n
Performance Management Architect enabled applications list dimensions under the

l e
EPMA node in Shared Services. All other non-dimensional artifacts are listed under the

c
Planning or Default application group.

r a
O
A-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

NOTE
For a complete list of Planning Artifacts, refer to the EPM Lifecycle Management
Documentation Guide.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-9
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Performance Management Architect Artifacts

Application Shared Dimension Data

Metadata Dimensions Access Synchronization
Application Properties Entity Import Profiles Synchronizations

Plan Types Account Mapping Tables

Import Profile and any other External File

dimension in the Definitions
Shared Library

Common Dimensions Interface Table

Definitions

Calculation Manager
Artifacts

m y
Note: Artifacts vary by implementation

d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Performance Management Architect Artifacts
c l
r a
You use Lifecycle Management to migrate repository content for these types of
Performance Management Architect artifacts:
Application Metadata O ly
Shared Dimensions
l & On
Dimension Access
n a e
Data Synchronization
t e r U s
I n
Performance Management Architect artifacts are listed under the EPMA node in the
Foundation application group in the Shared Services Console. EPMA dimensions and
l e
Calculation Manager artifacts are listed in the application node under the EPMA node.
c
r a
O
A-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Calculation Manager Artifacts

Rules Rule Sets Templates

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Calculation Manager Artifacts
c l
a
You use Lifecycle Management to migrate these types of Calculation Manager artifacts:
r
Rules
O ly
Rule Sets

l & On
Templates

n a e
t e r s
Calculation Manager artifacts are listed under the EPMA node in the Foundation
application group in the Shared Services Console.
U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-11
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Shared Services Artifacts

Native Directory
Users
Groups
Roles
Delegated Lists
Assigned Roles

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Shared Services Artifacts
c l
r a
You use Lifecycle Management to migrate Native Directory artifacts in Shared Services.
Shared Services artifacts are listed in the Foundation application group in Shared

O ly
Services Console. Only LCM administrators can view Shared Services artifacts in the
Foundation application group.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Viewing and Searching for Artifacts

Click Search

Click Expand to view

artifact list.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Viewing and Searching for Artifacts
c l
r a
The Lifecycle Management interface enables you to view, search, migrate, load, export,
and import artifacts. The artifacts are sorted into categories so that they are exposed in
an organized manner.
O ly
l & On
The tabular Lifecycle Management interface enables you to view multiple applications.

n a e
To view artifacts:

t e r U s
1. Expand the Application Groups node in the View Pane to view application groups.

I n
2. Expand an application group to view applications.

l e
3. Click an application to view the artifact listing (or right-click the application and select
c
Explore).

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-13
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

To search for artifacts:

1. View artifacts. See procedure above.
2. .Click Search Artifacts (above the artifact listing).
3. Enter search options:
Artifact NameThe name of the artifact. Use an asterisk (*) as the wildcard in
pattern searches or to search for artifacts that match filter conditions. For example,
entering A* returns all artifacts that begin with A (or lowercase a, since the search
is not case-sensitive). *A returns all artifacts that end with A (or lowercase a).
Date Modified
Start Date
End Date
Modified ByThe name of the user. Use an asterisk (*) as the wildcard in pattern
searches or to search for artifacts that match filter conditions. The search is not
case-sensitive.
Note: If you dont enter search criteria, all artifacts display upon search.
m y
4. Click Search.

d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
l
Migrating Applications and Artifacts - Process Overview
c
r a
The five step process above outlines the process for migrating applications and artifacts.
When you define your migration, you can optionally save the migration definition to a file
O ly
so that you can reuse it. Creating and saving a migration definition saves the migration

l
multiple applications together. & On
as an XML file. In a migration definition, you can specify multiple tasks to migrate

n a e
You can use the migration XML file with the command-line utility to perform batch
processing.
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-15
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Migration Scenarios

OR To and From the

file system

Application to Application

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Migration Scenarios
c l
system.
r a
You can migrate artifacts directly from one application to another or to and from the file

O ly
Some EPM System products do not support direct application to application migration

Management Documentation Guide.l & On

using Lifecycle Management. See the product appendices in the EPM Lifecycle

n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Migration Guidelines
c l
a
When migrating applications and artifacts to a new environment, follow these guidelines:
r
O ly
For Planning Classic applications, create a shell application in the destination
environment

l & On
Import the following artifacts in the order listed:

n a e
- Shared Services Native Directory (Security)

e r s
- Application Settings under Configuration Properties
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-17
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

- Global Artifacts:
Spread Patterns
Smart Lists
Common Dimensions
Exchange Rates
- All Standard and Attribute Dimensions under Plan Type
- Configuration:
User Variables
User Preferences
- Substitution Variables under Global Artifacts
- Plan Type:
Substitution Variables
Calc Scripts

m y
Rules files
- Global Artifacts: d e
Business Rules
c a
Custom Menus
e A
- Data Forms under Plan Type
c l
- Global Artifacts:
r a
Composite Forms O ly
Task Lists
l & On
- Data
n a e
e r s
- Access Permissions under Security
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Directly from One Application to

Another

Application to Application

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
l
Migrating Directly from One Application to Another
c
r a
Direct application to application migrations can only occur between like applications
that are registered with the same Shared Services instance. For example, Essbase to

O ly
Essbase, Planning to Planning, or Financial Management to Financial Management. You

& On
cannot migrate a Financial Management application to a Planning application.

l
a e
To migrate directly from one application to another:
n
e r s
1. Launch Shared Services Console.
t U
n
2. View and select the applications to be migrated.
I
c l e
3. Click Define Migration to display the Migration Wizard.
4. On the Source page, select the source applications for migration, and click Next.

r a
5. On the Source Options page, enter information about the source, and click Next.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-19
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

6. On the Destination page, specify the Applications destination, and click Next
7. On the Destination Options page, review the destination options, and click Next.
8. On the Migration Summary page, review the source and destination options you
specified. Click Back to make changes.
9. Save the migration definition for a later migration or click Execute Migration.
10. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Applications to an Intermediary File

You use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate

applications and artifacts to an intermediary file.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
l
Migrating Applications to an Intermediary File
c
r a
You use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate applications and artifacts for both
the connected and disconnected environments.
NOTE O ly
l & On
If the source and destination applications are installed on a connected

n a e
environment, you can use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate
applications and artifacts directly from the source to the destination application.

t e r U s
I n
To migrate applications and artifacts to an intermediar y file:

l e
1. On your desktop, double-click the Shared Services icon and log on to Shared
c
Services.

r a
2. In Application Management, expand the Applications Groups and folders.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-21
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

3. Select the application or artifacts that you want to migrate.

4. Click Define Migration.
The Migration Wizard is displayed.
5. On the Source page, select the source application for migration.
6. Click Next.
The Source Options page is displayed.
7. Click Next.
The Destination page is displayed.
8. Expand and select File System.
9. In the text box, enter the name of the folder.
The file is saved at the following location -
(C:/Hyperion/common/import_export/<username>/<folder>) and
is displayed in the view pane under Application Groups > File
System.
NOTE
m y
e
If your applications are installed on a connected environment, you can migrate the
d
application.
c a
application directly by expanding Shared Services and selecting the destination

e A
l
10. Click Next to display the Destination Options page.
c
a
11. Click Next to display the Migration Summary page.
r
O ly
12. Review the migration details, and click Execute Migration.
NOTE

l & On
You can also save the file for later migration by clicking Save Definition on the

n
Migration Summary page.a e
t e r U s
13. Click OK.
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Applications from an

Intermediary File to a Destination Application
You use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate
applications and artifacts from the Intermediary file to a
destination application.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
l
Migrating Applications from an Intermediary File to a Destination
c
Application
r a
After you migrate the applications and artifacts from the source application to an
O ly
intermediary file, you use FTP, DVD, or some other transfer method to transfer the

l & On
intermediary file from the source instance of Shared Services to the destination instance
of Shared Services (in a disconnected environment).

n a e
In a connected environment, use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate

t e r U s
applications and artifacts from the intermediary file to a destination application.

I n
To migrate applications and artifacts from an intermediar y file to a

c l e
destination application:
1. Log on to destination instance of Shared Services.

r a
2. Expand Application Groups.
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-23
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

3. Expand File System.

4. Select the intermediary file you created in the source environment.
The application and artifacts in the file are displayed.
5. Select the application or artifacts you want to migrate.
6. Click Define Migration to display the Migration Wizard.
7. If the source application is displayed, select the application and click Remove Source.
8. Select the file for migration.
9. Click Next to display the Source Options page.
10. Click Next to display the Destination page.
11. Expand Shared Services and select the destination application.
12. Click Next to display the Destination Options page.
13. Specify the destination options.
14. Click Next to display the Migration Summary page.
15. Review the migration particulars, and click Execute Migration. m y
d e
NOTE

c a
You can also save the file for later migration by clicking Save Definition on the
Migration Summary page.

e A
16. Click OK. c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for

Editing
You can export individual artifacts to the file system, edit them,
and import them after editing.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
l
Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for Editing
c
Application Migration Wizard.
r a
You can export or import a single artifact to or from the local file system without using

O ly
To export individual artifacts:
l & On
Services.
n a e
1. On your desktop, double-click the Shared Services icon and log on to Shared

t e r U s
2. In the view pane, expand the Application Groups containing the artifact.

I n
3. Expand the application to display the individual artifact.

l e
4. Right-click the artifact and select Export for Edit.
c
a
5. In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-25
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

6. Specify the save location on the local file system and click Save.
NOTE
If you export the artifact in an XML file, you can modify the exported artifact in the
file system before importing it.

To import individual artifacts:

1. On your desktop, double-click the Shared Services icon and log on to Shared
Services.
2. In the view pane, expand the Application Groups containing the artifact.
3. Expand the application to display the individual artifacts.
4. Right-click any artifact in the application and select Import after Edit.
The Import After Edit dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Browse and select the file where the edited artifact is saved.
6. Click Finish.
m y
d e
NOTE

c a
Artifacts must already reside in the system to perform an edit and an import.

e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-26 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Automating Migration Tasks

Using the tool, you can:

Schedule migrations using a third-party scheduling service
such as Windows Task Scheduler or Oracle Enterprise
Manager
Ensure secure access to the utility.
View error logs to facilitate troubleshooting

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Automating Migration Tasks
c l
r a
The Lifecycle Management Utility is a command-line tool that supports the migration of
artifacts across product environments and operating systems. The utility provides an

O ly
alternate way to migrate entire applications, or individual artifacts, from source to
destination.

l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-27
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Running the Lifecycle Management Utility

Follow these steps when using the utility:

1. Create the migration definition file
2. Modify the property file to use for the migration
3. Open a command prompt
4. Enter command arguments

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Running the Lifecycle Management Utility
c l
Note the following information for using the utility:

r a
Creating the migration definition file - You must define the artifacts for migration in a
O ly
migration definition file. Planning provides sample files (located in LCM_HOME/samples)

& On
for you to model the migration definition.
l
n a e
Modifying the property file to use for the migration - Use the
migration.properties file to set the global parameters for Lifecycle Management

e r s
Utility migrations. The migration.properties file is located in the LCM_HOME/conf
t U
directory, for example, HYPERION_HOME/common/utilities/LCM/9.5.0.0/conf.

I n
Opening a command prompt - open window and change the directory to the location of

l e
Utility.bat, for example, HYPERION_HOME/common/utilities/lcm/9.5.0.0/bin.

c
r a
O
A-28 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Entering command arguments - Execute the utility by entering the following text at the
command prompt: Utility.bat c:/lcm/lcmdefinition.xml (where
c:/lcm/lcmdefinition.xml is the location of the migration definition file).

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-29
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Accessing and Viewing the Migration Status

Report

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
l
Accessing and Viewing the Migration Status Report
c
Shared Services Console.
r a
You can access and view Migration Status Reports from the Administration menu in the

O ly
When you execute a migration, you can immediately view the status of the migration in
the Migration Status Report.
l & On
n a e
To view the Migration Status Report:

t e r U s
1. In the Shared Services Console, select Administration > Migration Status Report.

I n
2. Select the date (number of days) when the migration was performed.

c l e
The report displays the migration, status, completed time (date
and time), and total number of artifacts migrated.

r a
O
A-30 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

3. In the Action column, click View Details to view details of the migration by task and
status.
4. Optional: Perform an action:
Click View Definition File to export the detailed report to an XML file.
Click Log File to view a log file of the detailed report.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-31
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Accessing and Viewing the Comparison Report

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
l
Accessing and Viewing the Comparison Report
c
r a
Because it is important to understand the differences between two environments before
migration, LCM administrators can use the reporting capabilities of LCM to compare

O ly
applications, directories, and artifacts on different environments.

l & On
Comparisons can be done at the application level or directory level. The Compare
functionality performs a comparison based on the last modified time stamp. You can view

n a e
comparisons in the Shared Services Console or save them as a report (CSV file).
Note the following:
t e r U s
I n
You can only compare artifacts that support the last modified time parameter. For
artifacts that do not support this parameter, the report displays NA. For a listing of
l e
artifacts that support the last modified time parameter, see the Planning and Lifecycle
c
Management Appendix in the EPM Lifecycle Management Documentation Guide.

r a
O
A-32 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

When artifacts are exported to the file system, they retain the last modified time the
artifact was updated in the native product.
For Planning artifacts, the Comparison Report uses the artifact name rather than the
artifact ID.

To generate comparison reports:

1. Launch Shared Services Console.
2. Right-click the source application and select Compare.
3. In the Compare window, select the destination application to compare.
4. Click Compare.
5. Enter report generation parameters:
Per Page - Select the number of artifacts to display per page.
Filter - Choose from these options:
Only/Newer in Source - Lists the applications that have newer versions in the
source environment or are only found in the source.
m y
e
Only/Newer in Destination - Lists the applications that have newer versions in
d
the destination environment or are only found in the destination.

c a
All - Lists all applications in both environments and highlights any differences.

e A
6. To view or save Compare Report in a CSV file format, click Export to CSV.
7. To close Compare Report, click OK.
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-33
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Viewing Audit Reports

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Viewing Audit Reports
c l
a
Every action performed in Lifecycle Management is logged in the following audit reports:
r
O ly
Artifact reportsDisplays information on the artifacts that were imported or
exported using the Life Cycle Management functionality.

l & On
Configuration reportsGenerates an audit report about the configuration tasks

a e
that were performed in the past.
n
NOTE

t e r U s
Auditing must be configured before you can generate audit reports.

I n
c l e
r a
O
A-34 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

To view audit reports:

1. In the Shared Services Console, select Administration > Audit Reports.
2. Select a report type (Artifact or Configuration)
3. Select the user and the period for which the report is to be generated.
4. Perform an action:
Click View Report.
Select Detailed View and then click View Report to display the report based on the
modified attribute and the new attribute value.
8. Optional: Click Export to export the report to a CSV file, which can be opened in
Microsoft Excel.
By default, the artifact report is named AuditArtifactReport.txt.
9. Click Close.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration A-35
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix A Migrating Artifacts with Lifecycle Management

Summary
In this appendix, you should have learned to:

Describe Lifecycle Management features and requirements

Import and export Artifacts
Migrate Applications or Artifacts
View LCM Reports

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
A-36 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 A P P E N D I X B

Installing and Configuring Financial Data

Quality Management B

Objectives
At the end of this appendix, you should be able to:
Describe FDM
Install and configure FDM
Install the Planning adapter for FDM
Create FDM applications and connect them to Planning

m y
d e
ca
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Financial Data Quality Management Overview

Data Source

Reporting and Analysis Financial Management Planning Essbase

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Financial Data Quality Management Overview
c l
r a
FDM is an out-of-the-box data transformation tool that feeds source-level financial data
to consolidation, reporting, planning, and analytical applications. More than just a data
O ly
translation tool, FDM provides an audit trail to the source financial data, helping to

l & On
ensure data integrity and mapping consistency that allows for easy reconciliation of
financial data. By providing an audit trail to the source financial data, FDM saves end
a e
users, administrators, and auditors time associated with data error investigation,
n
t e r
identification, and correction.

U s
FDM requires minimal IT involvement and offers a consistent, user-friendly environment

I n
that provides a uniform data collection process for all reporting units within the
organization. It also contains financial controls functionality to assist corporations with
l e
their internal financial controls process. FDM contains prebuilt integration adaptors for
c
r a
Hyperion Enterprise, Financial Management, Essbase Services, and Planning; it can
also be used to load data into any financial consolidation or analytical application.

O
B-2 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Installation Prerequisites
c l
a
This topic covers the software and hardware requirements of FDM.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-3
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Operating System and Processors

The following operating systems are supported:

Operating System Notes

Windows 2003 SP1 Pentium 4 processor is supported only for
FDM Web Server (per 75 concurrent
users).
Dual Pentium 4, 2 GHz supported only for
FDM Application Server (per 75 concurrent
users)
Quad Pentium processor supported only for
FDM Database Server.

Disk Space and RAM

Disk space and RAM requirements are approximate. The installation program calculates
the required disk space, based on your installation choices.
Disk space estimates include documentation help files (if applicable) and EPM System
common components. The following table lists the minimum disk space and RAM
requirements per component.
m y
Component Disk Space RAM
d e
FDM Database Server Dependent on size of FDM
application c a
1 GB per 75 concurrent
users (2 GB minimum)
FDM folder structure
e
Dependent on size of FDM A
50 MB

l
application
c
FDM Application Server
r a
200 MB 2 GB (per 75
concurrent users)
FDM Web Server
O ly
200 MB 2 GB

l & On
Third-Party Software
n a e
Requirements t e r
The following third-party software are required:

U s Notes

I n
Microsoft MDAC 2.8 or later Required only for FDM Application Server. On

l e
Microsoft Excel 2000 or later

c
Windows 2003, MDAC is installed with FDM.

r a
Microsoft IIS 6.0 (on Windows Server 2003)
Microsoft MDAC 2.8 or later
Required only for FDM Web Server. On
Windows 2003, MDAC is installed with FDM.

O
B-4 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Repository Databases
The following databases are supported:
Oracle Database 9.2.0.5 11g (11.1.0.6.0)
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 SP3a 2005 SP1

Working with Oracle Server

Oracle recommends that you use a separate database instance exclusively for FDM.
Multiple FDM application schemas can reside in one database instance.
FDM uses the FDM Oracle account to access the FDM Oracle database. FDM can use
Windows Integrated Security or the Oracle account that you specify.
When FDM is configured with Windows Integrated Security, the FDM Application Server
account is used to log on to the Oracle database. When the Workbench client is used,
the Windows user executing the workbench is used to log on to the Oracle database.
For details about connecting to Oracle through Windows integrated security, see Oracle
Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management DBA Guide.

y
Oracle FDM accounts must be granted the DBA role or the following system privileges:
m
CREATE PROCEDURE
d e
CREATE SEQUENCE
CREATE SESSION c a
CREATE TABLE
e A
CREATE TRIGGER
c l
CREATE VIEW r a
O ly
The default tablespace for an FDM account is Users. You can create and assign a
& On
separate tablespace for the FDM account. The account should have an unlimited quota
l
n a e
on the tablespace used. If you want to ensure that the user does not exceed a space-
used threshold or if you have any questions about the appropriate value for the quota,

t e r U s
consult the database administrator.

I n
Working with SQL Server

c l e
To access the SQL Server database, FDM uses the FDM SQL Server account. When
accessing the database, FDM can use Windows Integrated Security or a specified SQL

a
Server account.
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-5
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

When you configure FDM to use Windows Integrated Security, the FDM Application
Server account is used to log on to the SQL Server database. When the Workbench
client is used, the Windows user executing Workbench is used to log on to the SQL
Server database.
The account used to create a database must have SQL Server system administrator or
database creator and bulk-insert administrator rights. After the database is created, the
account can be limited to bulk-insert administrator and db-owner rights. The account
used for running the MSSQLServer Windows service must have read access to the FDM
application data folder for each application.
By default, SQL Server 2005 disables TCP/IP connections to the database. Ensure that
the TCP/IP connections are enabled.
SQL Server requires Microsoft OLE DB Provider.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-6 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Installation Process

Install the program files

Configure the FDM components
Create an FDM application
Install the Essbase adapter
Connect to a Planning application

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installation Process
c l
a
The FDM installation consists of five components:
r
Web Server
O ly
Task Manager
l & On
Application Server

n a e
Load Balance Manager
Workbench Client
t e r U s
I n
You install all FDM components via the EPM System Installer. You must then use the

l e
EPM System Configurator to register FDM with Shared Services. Once registered, you
c
launch a separate configuration utility for FDM components from the Start menu.

r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-7
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Once you have configured all FDM components, you create an FDM application, install
adapters for Planning, and connect the FDM application to a Planning application.

NOTE
You download FDM installation files, standard templates, reports, and adapters
from Oracle E-Delivery.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-8 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Installing Program Files

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installing Program Files
c l
a
The FDM installation program copies the required program files to a FDM server.
r
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-9
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Configuring FDM Components
c l
Web Server Components
r a
O ly
The Web server components enable users to access FDM applications through a Web
browser. The Web-based interface provides functionality to all features in FDM and can

l & On
be used by end users and administrators alike. Installed components include a virtual

a e
Web directory on the Web server as well as other FDM components.

n
Task Manager

t e r U s
The Task Manager component installs a Windows service that runs scheduled tasks

I n
(FDM scripts) at specified intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly). You can install Task

l e
Manager on any server that has access to the FDM application, including the Web
server, the application server, or the data server where the FDM data resides.
c
r a
O
B-10 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Application Server
The application server component allows the execution of resource-intensive tasks on a
server other than the Web server. You can also use the application server to limit
database and file system access to a server behind a firewall while the Web server is in
front of the firewall.
Load Balance Manager
The Load Balance Manager component is responsible for load balancing the application
servers and storing the application configuration. You typically install Load Balance
Manager on a machine that is running the application server component and an optional
backup Load Balance Manager on another application server.
Workbench
Workbench is a Windows client application that serves as an administration and
development environment. Here, you can access integration adapters, scripts, and
reports.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-11
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Configuring Web Server Components

This account information is

stored in the IIS metabase.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Web Server Components
c l
r a
When configuring Web server components, you must specify the Windows accounts
under which .NET services and DCOM objects run. The Windows account must have full

O ly
control permission for the FDM application folders, as well as rights to the target system.

l & On
You must specify the name of a load balance server for the Web server components.
This computer stores FDM application information and performs load balancing on

n a e
application servers. If you specify a backup server, any time you create, modify, add, or

t e r U s
remove an application, the application configuration file, FDMLoadBalancerGroups.xml,
is copied from the load balance server to the backup load balance server.

I n
c l e
r a
O
B-12 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

To configure Web server components:

1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management > Web
Server Components > Web Config Manager.
The Web Config Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. On the General tab, enter the requested information.
TIP
You use the Windows Service account used to run the .NET and FDM DCOM
processes.

3. On the Load Balance Server tab, type the FDM application server name where the
FDM Load Balance component is installed.
4. Click OK.
5. Stop and restart the IIS service.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-13
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Configuring the Task Manager and Application

Server Components

For Task Manager, assign this

user account the Logon as a
Service access priviledge.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
l
Configuring the Task Manager and Application Server Components
c
r a
Task Manager consists of a Windows service and a Windows client program. You must
specify the Windows account under which the Windows service and FDM DCOM objects

O ly
run. For Task Manager, you must also specify the name of a load balance server.

& On
The Windows account for Task Manager must have the following properties:
l
a e
Full control permission for the FDM application folders residing on the data server
n
t e r
Rights to the target system

U s
n
Logon as a Service user rights
I
c l e
r a
O
B-14 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

To configure Task Manager:

1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management > Task
Manager > Task Manager Configuration.
The Task Manager Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. On the General tab, enter the requested information.
TIP
You use the Windows Service account used to run the .NET and FDM DCOM
processes.

3. On the Load Balance Server tab, type the FDM application server name where the
FDM Load Balance component is installed.
4. Click OK.

To configure the application server:

1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management >
Application Server > Application Server Config Manager.
m y
The Application Server Configuration dialog box is displayed.
d e
2. On the General tab, enter the requested information.
c a
TIP

e A
processes.
c l
You use the Windows Service account used to run the .NET and FDM DCOM

r a
3. Click OK. O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-15
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Configuring Load Balance Manager

Define a server cluster for

load balancing.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Load Balance Manager
c l
a
You perform these tasks to configure Load Balance Manager:
r
O ly
Specify the Windows account under which Load Balance Manager DCOM objects
run. The Windows account must have full control permission on the FDM application
& On
folders that reside on the data server, as well as rights to the target system.
l
a e
Specify the application servers in the load-balancing cluster.
n
t e r U s
Define the external authentication provider (MSAD, NTLM, or LDAP).

I n
To configure Load Balance Manager:

l e
1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System >Financial Data Quality Management > Load
c
Balance Manager > Load Balance Configuration.

r a The Load Balance Configuration dialog box is displayed.

O
B-16 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

2. On the General tab, enter the requested information.

TIP
You use the Windows Service account used to run the FDM DCOM process and
Load Balance server.

3. On the Application Servers tab, click Add.

4. In the Application Server Name text box, type the name of a FDM application server
and click OK.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add all servers to the load-balancing cluster.
6. On the Authentication Providers tab, click Add.
7. Select the external authentication provider and click OK.
The Authentication Provider dialog box is displayed.
8. Enter the required information for the selected authentication provider, and click OK.
The Load Balance Configuration dialog box is displayed.
9. Click OK. m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-17
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Configuring Workbench

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Configuring Workbench
c l
r a
When configuring the Workbench client, you specify the computer that is running the
FDM Load Balance Manager. This computer stores FDM application information and

O ly
performs load balancing on application servers.

To configure Workbench:
l & On
n a e
1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management >

e r s
Workbench > Workbench client.
t U
n
The Workbench client is displayed.
I
c l e
2. In the Load Balance Server Groups window, click Add.
The Load Balance Server dialog box is displayed.

r a
3. In the Group Name text box, type DefaultLoadBalancer.
O
B-18 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

4. In the Primary Server text box, type the name of the application server that runs the
FDM Load Balance Manager.
5. Optional: In the Backup Server text box, type the name of the application server used
as the backup server for load balancing.
6. Click OK.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-19
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Application Creation Overview

After installing and configuring the FDM software, you perform

these steps to create an FDM application:
1. Create an application
2. Import standard reports and templates
3. Install the Essbase adapter
4. Connect to an Essbase application used as a data store
for a Planning application

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Application Creation Overview
c l
FDM application: r a
After installing and configuring the FDM software, you perform these steps to create an

1. Create an application O ly
l & On
2. Import standard reports and templates

n a e
3. Install the Essbase adapter

t e r U s
4. Connect to an Essbase application used as a data store for a Planning application

I n
c l e
r a
O
B-20 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
Creating Applications
c l
created.
r a
When you create an application, a relational database for the application is automatically

O ly
If you are using SQL Server, the user that you specify as the database user must be
& On
either a SQL Server administrator or have database creator and bulk insert rights.
l
a e
If you are using Oracle, the user that you specify as the database user must have either
n
Create Procedure
t e r
the Database Creator role or the following system privileges:

U s
Create Sequence
I n
l e
Create Session
c
a
Create Table
r
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-21
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Create Trigger
Create View
Create Query Rewrite

To create a new application:

1. In Internet Explorer, enter the following URL:
http://<Web Server Name>/HyperionFDM/
The Login dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Application list, select <New Application>.
3. Enter admin as the username with password as the password, and click Logon.
The New Application dialog box is displayed.
4. On the General tab, enter the requested information.
5. On the Database tab, enter the requested information and click OK.
The application folders and database are created.
m y
6. At the Application Successfully Created prompt, click OK.
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-22 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Installing Standard Reports

After you install the standard reports, they are displayed on the
Reports tab in Workbench .

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installing Standard Reports
c l
a
You import standard reports into your test application from the Workbench.
r
To install the standard reports: O ly
l & On
1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management >

a e
Workbench > Workbench client.

n
t e
2. Select the Reports tab.
r U s
The Workbench Configuration dialog box is displayed.

I n
3. Select File > Import.

c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-23
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

4. Browse to select the standard reports file:

For applications that use SQL Server, select the file
StandardReportsSQLServer1111Active.xml
For applications that use Oracle, select the file StandardReportsOracle1111Active.xml.
5. Click Open.
The Import dialog box is displayed.
6. On the General tab, select Reports.
7. Click OK.
The imported reports are displayed on the Reports tab.
8. Select File > Exit..

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-24 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Installing Standard Templates

You can verify the templates installation by viewing them in the Web
client.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installing Standard Templates
c l
a
You copy these files to the Templates folder of your test application.
r
To install standard templates: O ly
l & On
1. In the ZIP file FinancialDataManagement-Templates11110.zip, unzip all files to the

a e
templates folder under the outbox folder in your data folder structure.

n
t e r U s
2. In Internet Explorer, enter the following URL:

I n
http://<Server Name>/HyperionFDM/
The Login dialog box is displayed.

c l e
3. In the Application list, select your test application.

r a
4. In the User Name text box, type the administrator user name.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-25
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

5. In the Password text box, type the password.

6. In the Domain text box, type the domain.
7. Click Logon.
The Web client is displayed.
8. In the navigation pane, select Tools > Templates.
The standard templates are listed.
9. Close Internet Explorer.

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-26 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Installing the Essbase Adapter

Adapters are displayed on the Integration Adapters tab in the

Workbench after you import them.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
ca
e A
Installing the Essbase Adapter
c l
r a
Adapters are predefined software components that communicate with various source
and target applications. Each adapter is programmed to integrate with a specific source
O ly
(SAP or SQL, for example) or target system (Essbase Services, Planning, etc.).

l & On
NOTE
n a e
Services.
t e r U s
You use the ES9x-G4-B adapter for release 11.1.1 of Planning and Essbase

I n
l e
Adapter components:

c
r a
EXEContains all instructions for FDM to communicate with the specified source
and target applications. Planning uses the upsES9xG4B.exe.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-27
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

XMLContains all data relating to the FDM application that is being integrated. It
stores application setup parameters and scripts to call API functions and return the
results from the target application. You use the ES9x-G4-B.xml as the XML file for
Planning and Essbase Services.
You must create a machine profile for each adapter XML component. The machine
profile contains the information to allow FDM to determine the location of the source
and target database servers. The machine profile also stores global logon
information for connecting to the target application.

To install and register the Essbase adapter:

1. Select Start > Programs > Oracle EPM System > Financial Data Quality Management >
Workbench > Workbench client.
The Workbench Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the Adapters tab.
3. Select File > Import.
The Open Import File dialog box is displayed.

m y
4. Browse to select the ES9x-G4-B.xml file and click Open.
5. Select Integration Adapters and click OK. d e
c a
6. Select the Options tab, and as preferred, check or clear the following options:
Save existing machine profile
e A
c l
Remove all report groups before updating reports
Import maps with locations
r a
7. Click OK. O ly
l & On
8. From the Workbench desktop, select File > Register Adapter.

n a e
9. From the list, select the upsES9xG4B.exe and click Open.

e r s
The Essbase adapter is registered with FDM.
t U
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-28 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Connecting to Planning

Identifies the target syst em.

Identifies the application for t he connection.

m y
d e
Copyright 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
c a
e A
Connecting to Planning
c l
r a
You connect your test application to Planning by configuring the application and
integration settings in the Web client. You use the System Code application setting to
O ly
identify Planning as the target system. You use the Application Name integration setting

login method.
l & On
to identify the Planning application that you want to connect to. You must also select the

n a e
To connect to Planning:

t e r U s
1. In Internet Explorer, enter the URL http://<Server Name>/HyperionFDM/.
I n
The Login dialog box is displayed.

c l e
2. Log on to the test application that you created.

r a
3. Select Administration > Application Settings.

O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-29
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

4. In the System Code list, select ES9x-G4-B and click Save.

5. Select Administration > Integration Settings.
6. Enter the following information and click Save.
a. In the Option list, select Application Name.
b. In the App Name text box, type Comma.
7. In the Option list, select Logon Method.
8. In the Logon Method list, select one of the following options:
Select Unified if you want user to be logged on to the target application using the
user name and password with which they logged on to FDM.
Select Global if you want all users to be logged on to the target application using
the same user name and password.
NOTE
If you select the Global method, you must specify the user name and
password for the target application. Select Global Logon Information from the
Options list.
m y
d e
9. Click Save.
c a
10. Select Activities > Map to verify the connection.
The mapping grid is displayed.
e A
11. Click Add. c l
A row is added to the grid. r a
O ly
12. Double-click in the Target Account column.

l & On
13. In the drop-down menu, select Browse for Target Value.

n a e
A list of account members for the Account dimension of the Comma application
is displayed.
t e r U s
14. Click Cancel.
I n
c l e
15. Select File > Exit.
16. Close your browser.

r a
O
B-30 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

Summary
In this appendix, you should have learned to:

Describe FDM
Install and configure FDM
Install the Planning adapter for FDM
Create FDM applications and connect them to Planning

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration B-31
 Module 5 Appendices
Appendix B Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management

m y
d e
c a
e A
c l
r a
O ly
l & On
n a e
t e r U s
I n
c l e
r a
O
B-32 Planning 11.1.1: Installation and Configuration